ACS800 UserManual
ACS800 UserManual
ACS800 UserManual
Firmware Manual
ACS800 Standard Control Program 7.x
3AFE64527592 REV I
EN
EFFECTIVE: 18.05.2007
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction to the manual
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
15
15
15
17
21
22
22
Control panel
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel operation mode keys and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive control with the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start, stop and change direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to set speed reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actual signal display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to select actual signals to the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display the full name of the actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to view and reset the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display and reset an active fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to select a parameter and change the value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to enter an assistant, browse and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to upload data from a drive to the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
34
35
36
Table of Contents
37
38
39
39
40
Program features
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-up Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The default order of the tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of tasks and the relevant drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents of the assistant displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram: reference source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference types and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update cycles in the Standard Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update cycles in the Standard Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update cycles in the Standard Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update cycles in the Standard Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
41
41
41
41
42
43
43
44
44
44
44
45
45
46
46
46
47
47
48
49
49
49
49
50
50
50
50
51
51
51
51
52
52
52
52
53
53
53
53
53
54
54
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Magnetising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flux Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flux Optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Critical speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scalar control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hexagonal motor flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AI<Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor temperature thermal model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of the motor thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supervision of optional IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preprogrammed faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
55
55
55
55
55
56
56
56
57
57
57
57
57
57
58
58
58
59
59
60
60
60
60
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
62
62
62
62
63
63
63
63
63
63
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
Table of Contents
Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame sizes R7 and R8
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control board temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supervisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sleep function for the process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor temperature measurement through an analogue I/O extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adaptive Programming using the function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DriveAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control of a mechanical brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation time scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
State shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master/Follower use of several drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduced Run function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
64
64
65
65
65
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
68
68
69
69
69
70
70
70
71
72
72
73
74
74
74
74
75
75
76
77
78
78
78
78
79
80
80
80
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
81
81
82
82
Application macros
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection example, 24 VDC / 420 mA two-wire sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequential Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
83
84
85
86
87
88
88
89
90
91
92
92
93
94
Table of Contents
10
32 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34 PROCESS VARIABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35 MOT TEMP MEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40 PID CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42 BRAKE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50 ENCODER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51 COMM MODULE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52 STANDARD MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60 MASTER/FOLLOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70 DDCS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72 USER LOAD CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85 USER CONSTANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90 D SET REC ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92 D SET TR ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95 HARDWARE SPECIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96 EXTERNAL AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98 OPTION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
147
148
150
152
157
159
160
160
161
163
164
166
167
168
169
170
170
173
175
181
Fieldbus control
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up communication through the Standard Modbus Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modbus addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up communication through Advant controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fieldbus reference selection and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used .
Block diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used .
Block Diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used
Communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABB Drives communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
03.01 MAIN CONTROL WORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generic Drive communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive commands supported by the Generic Drive communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
185
185
186
187
189
190
191
193
196
197
197
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
204
205
206
208
209
210
211
11
212
212
212
213
213
214
214
215
216
216
217
217
218
218
219
219
220
220
221
221
222
223
224
Fault tracing
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning messages generated by the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
225
225
225
225
225
226
233
234
243
243
243
243
244
245
Table of Contents
12
247
247
248
251
Table of Contents
259
260
262
264
266
267
13
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with Standard Control Program version ASXR7320. See
parameter 33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION.
Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive.
Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use
the drive. The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the
Hardware Manual.
Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the
default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes are
given in this manual in the section describing the related user-adjustable
parameters.
Reader
The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring
practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.
Contents
The manual consists of the following chapters:
Start-up and control through the I/O instructs in setting up the application
program, and how to start, stop and regulate the speed of the drive.
Control panel gives instructions for using the panel.
Program features contains the feature descriptions and the reference lists of the
user settings and diagnostic signals.
Application macros contains a short description of each macro together with a
connection diagram.
Actual signals and parameters describes the actual signals and parameters of the
drive.
Fault tracing lists the warning and fault messages with the possible causes and
remedies.
14
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select
Drives Training courses on the right pane.
15
16
POWER-UP
Apply mains power. The control panel first shows the panel
identification data
ACS800
ID NUMBER 1
(If no key is pressed for a few seconds, the display starts to alternate between the
Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on selecting the language.)
LANGUAGE ?
[ENGLISH]
ENTER:OK ACT:EXIT
or
) and
(The drive loads the selected language into use, shifts back to the Actual Signal
Display and starts to alternate between the Actual Signal Display and the
suggestion on starting the guided motor set-up.)
17
How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings)
Before you start, ensure you have the motor nameplate data at your hand.
SAFETY
The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the
appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions.
Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation
manual.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
- there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
- a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. (ID Run is essential
only in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.)
POWER-UP
Apply mains power. The control panel first shows the panel
identification data
ACS800
ID NUMBER 1
1
-> 0.0 rpm
99 START-UP DATA
01 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
1
-> 0.0 rpm
99 START-UP DATA
01 LANGUAGE
[ENGLISH]
or
or
or
18
1
-> 0.0 rpm
O
99 START-UP DATA
02 APPLICATION MACRO
[ ]
1
->
0.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
04 MOTOR CTRL MODE
[DTC]
- for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is
variable
- when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal current of
the inverter
- when the inverter is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
ABB Motors
3
motor
V
690 Y
400 D
660 Y
380 D
415 D
440 D
Cat. no
6312/C3
6210/C3
380 V
mains
voltage
180
IEC 34-1
1
-> 0.0 rpm
O
99 START-UP DATA
05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE
[ ]
1
-> 0.0 rpm
O
99 START-UP DATA
06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
[ ]
each of the nominal voltage ranges: 415 VAC for 400 VAC units, 500 VAC for 500
VAC units and 690 VAC for 600 VAC units.)
1
-> 0.0 rpm
99 START-UP DATA
07 MOTOR NOM FREQ
[ ]
1
-> 0.0 rpm
O
99 START-UP DATA
08 MOTOR NOM SPEED
[ ]
1
-> 0.0 rpm
O
99 START-UP DATA
09 MOTOR NOM POWER
[ ]
19
When the motor data has been entered, two displays (warning and
information) start to alternate. Move to next step without pressing
any key.
1
-> 0.0 rpm
ACS800
** WARNING **
ID MAGN REQ
20
1 L->[xxx] rpm
I
xxx Hz
FREQ
CURRENT
xx A
POWER
xx %
forward
direction
reverse
direction
1 L->
0.0 rpm
20 LIMITS
02 MAXIMUM SPEED
[ ]
1 L->
0.0 rpm
22 ACCEL/DECEL
02 ACCELER TIME 1
[ ]
1 L->
0.0 rpm
22 ACCEL/DECEL
03 DECELER TIME 1
[ ]
21
Ensure the drive is in external control mode. Press the LOC/REM key to
change between external and local control.
1
->
FREQ
CURRENT
POWER
1
-> 500.0 rpm I
FREQ
16.66 Hz
CURRENT
12.66 A
POWER
8.33 %
0.0 rpm I
0.00 Hz
0.00 A
0.00 %
1
-> 500.0 rpm I
16.66 Hz
FREQ
CURRENT
12.66 A
POWER
8.33 %
1
<- 500.0 rpm I
16.66 Hz
FREQ
CURRENT
12.66 A
POWER
8.33 %
1
-> 500.0 rpm O
0.00 Hz
FREQ
CURRENT
0.00 A
POWER
0.00 %
22
23
In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID run.
However:
The Motor ID Run can be stopped at any time by pressing the control panel stop
key ( ).
After the ID Run is started with the start key ( ), it is possible to monitor the
actual values by first pressing the ACT key and then a double-arrow key ( ).
24
25
Control panel
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how to use the control panel CDP 312R.
The same control panel is used with all ACS800 series drives, so the instructions
given apply to all ACS800 types. The display examples shown are based on the
Standard Control Program; displays produced by other application programs may
differ slightly.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
ENTER
LOC
RESET
REF
Use
Start
Stop
Fault reset
REM
0
5
Control panel
26
ACT
1 L ->
FREQ
CURRENT
POWER
1242.0 rpm O
45.00 Hz
80.00 A
75.00 %
Status row
Actual signal names
and values
ENTER
Parameter Mode
Status row
Parameter group
Status row
Drive selection
ID number change
ACS800
Device type
ASXR7260 xxxxxx
ID NUMBER 1
SW loading package
name and ID number
Group selection
Fast value change
PAR
Parameter selection
Slow value change
Parameter
Parameter value
ENTER
Function Mode
Row selection
FUNC
Page selection
List of functions
Function start
ENTER
Drive Selection Mode
DRIVE
ENTER
Status row
The figure below describes the status row digits.
Drive ID number
Drive control status
L = Local control
R = Remote control
= External control
Control panel
1 L ->
1242.0 rpm I
Direction of rotation
-> = Forward
<- = Reverse
Drive reference
Drive status
I = Running
O = Stopped
= Run disabled
27
Action
1.
Press Key
ACT
PAR
FUNC
2.
LOC
REM
Display
1
->1242.0 rpm I
45.00 Hz
FREQ
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ
45.00 Hz
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
3.
To stop
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
FREQ
45.00 Hz
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
4.
To start
1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ
45.00 Hz
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
5.
6.
1 L <-1242.0 rpm I
45.00 Hz
FREQ
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
45.00 Hz
FREQ
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
Control panel
28
Action
1.
Press Key
ACT
PAR
FUNC
2.
3.
4.
LOC
REM
REF
(fast change)
To save the reference.
(The value is stored in the permanent memory; it is
restored automatically after power switch-off.)
Control panel
1
->1242.0 rpm I
45.00 Hz
FREQ
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ
45.00 Hz
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
1 L ->[1242.0 rpm]I
FREQ
45.00 Hz
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
1 L ->[1325.0 rpm]I
FREQ
45.00 Hz
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
(slow change)
5.
Display
ENTER
29
Action
1.
Press key
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
45.00 Hz
FREQ
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
ACT
2.
3.
4.
5.a
5.b
ENTER
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
Control panel
30
Action
Press key
Display
1.
Hold
ACT
2.
Release
ACT
Action
1.
Press key
ACT
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
45.00 Hz
FREQ
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
2.
3.
4.
Control panel
RESET
31
Action
1.
Press Key
ACT
2.
RESET
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm
ACS800
** FAULT **
ACS800 TEMP
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
FREQ
45.00 Hz
CURRENT
80.00 A
POWER
75.00 %
Event
Information on display
Name and
code
Sequential number
(1 is the most recent event)
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
2 LAST FAULT
+DC OVERVOLT (3210)
1121 H 1 MIN 23 S
Poweron time
Control panel
32
Parameter mode
In the Parameter Mode, the user can:
view the parameter values
change the parameter settings.
The panel enters the Parameter Mode when the user presses the PAR key.
How to select a parameter and change the value
Step
Action
1.
Press key
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
10 START/STOP/DIR
01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR
DI1,2
PAR
2.
To select a group.
3.
4.
5.
ENTER
6b.
ENTER
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
Control panel
33
Action
1.
Press Key
PAR
Display
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[000.000.00]
ENTER
2.
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[000.000.00]
3.
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[000.018.00]
4.
ENTER
1)
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[001.018.00]
Inversion field
Group field
Index field
Bit field
Control panel
34
Function mode
In the Function Mode, the user can:
start a guided procedure for adjusting the drive settings (assistants)
upload the drive parameter values and motor data from the drive to the panel.
download group 1 to 97 parameter values from the panel to the drive.
1)
1) The parameter groups 98, 99 and the results of the motor identification are not included by default. The restriction
prevents downloading of unfit motor data. In special cases it is, however, possible to download all. For more information,
please contact your local ABB representative.
Control panel
35
Action
1.
Press Key
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
FUNC
2.
ENTER
Motor Setup
1/10
ENTER: Ok/Continue
ACT: Exit
FUNC: More Info
4.
ENTER
Motor Setup
2/10
MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA
AVAILABLE?
ENTER:Yes FUNC:Info
5.
ENTER
Motor Setup
3/10
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[0 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
6.
Motor Setup
3/10
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[415 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:back
7.
FUNC
FUNC, ACT
INFO
P99.05
Set as given on the
motor nameplate.
ENTER
Motor Setup
4/10
MOTOR NOM CURRENT?
[0.0 A]
ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
RESET
Motor Setup
3/10
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[415 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:back
Control panel
36
Step
Action
8.
Press Key
2 x ACT
Display
1 L -> 0.0 rpm
FREQ
0.00
CURRENT
0.00
POWER
0.00
O
Hz
A
%
Action
1.
Press Key
FUNC
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
2.
3.
4.
5.
Control panel
ENTER
LOC
REM
1
-> 1242.0 rpm O
<=<=
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
=>=>
CONTRAST
4
37
Step
Action
6.
Press Key
Display
Action
1.
2.
3.
Press Key
LOC
REM
Display
4.
5.
6.
ENTER
Control panel
38
Action
1.
Press Key
Display
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
FUNC
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.a
6.b
Control panel
ENTER
ENTER
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
39
Action
1.
Press key
Display
ACS800
DRIVE
ASAAA5000 xxxxxx
ID NUMBER 1
2.
ACS800
ASAAA5000 xxxxxx
ID NUMBER 1
3.
1o
Status Display Symbols:
o = Drive stopped, direction
forward
= Drive running, direction
reverse
F = Drive tripped on a fault
PAR
ACT
FUNC
Control panel
40
Boolean
Hex
Control panel
Bit 0
41
Program features
Chapter overview
The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related
user settings, actual signals, and fault and warning messages.
Start-up Assistant
Introduction
The assistant guides the user through the start-up procedure, helping the user to
feed the requested data (parameter values) to the drive. The assistant also check
that the entered values are valid, i.e. within the allowed range. At the first start, the
drive suggests entering the first task of the assistant, Language Select,
automatically.
The Start-up Assistant is divided into tasks. The user may activate the tasks either
one after the other as the Start-up Assistant suggests, or independently. The user
may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the
assistant at all.
See chapter Control panel on how to start the assistant, browse and exit.
The default order of the tasks
Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 99.02), the
Start-up Assistant decide which consequent tasks it suggests. The default tasks are
shown in the table below.
Application
Selection
Default Tasks
FACTORY, SEQ
CTRL
Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Speed Control EXT1, Start/Stop
Control, Protections, Output Signals
HAND/AUTO
Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Speed Control EXT2, Start/Stop
Control, Speed Control 1, Protections, Output Signals
T CTRL
Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Torque Control, Start/Stop Control,
Speed Control EXT1, Protections, Output Signals
PID CTRL
Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, PID Control, Start/Stop Control, Speed
Control EXT1, Protections, Output Signals
Program features
42
Description
Set parameters
Language Select
99.01
Motor Set-up
Performing the motor identification. (If the speed limits are not in 99.10 (20.8, 20.07)
the allowed range: Setting the limits).
Application
Option Modules
Speed Control
EXT1
11.03
Speed Control
EXT2
Torque Control
PID Control
Start/Stop Control
11.04, 11.05
22.02, 22.03
(Group 12)
11.06
11.08, 11.07
11.06
11.08, 11.07
24.01, 24.02
11.06
11.08, 11.07
Setting the source and limits for the process actual value
Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external 10.01, 10.02
control locations, EXT1 and EXT2
Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2
11.02
10.03
16.01, 21.07
22.07
Protections
20.03, 20.04
Output Signals
Group 14
Program features
43
Information Display
1
2
3
4
Motor Setup
3/10
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[0 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
INFO
P99.05
Set as given on the motor
nameplate.
Request/question
Help text
Feed-in field
ACS800
External control
Standard I/O
Control panel
Fieldbus
adapter
Slot 1
DriveWindow
CH3
(DDCS)
RDCO
module
CH0
(DDCS)
Fieldbus adapter
Nxxx
or
Advant controller
(e.g. AC 80, AC 800M)
CH1
(DDCS)
AIMA-01 I/O
adapter module
RTAC/RDIO/RAIO
module
Program features
44
Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in
local control. L indicates local control on the panel display.
1 L ->1242 rpm
The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in
local mode.
External control
When the drive is in external control, the commands are given through the standard
I/O terminals (digital and analogue inputs), optional I/O extension modules and/or
the fieldbus interface. In addition, it is also possible to set the control panel as the
source for the external control.
External control is indicated by a blank on the panel display or with an R in those
special cases when the panel is defined as a source for external control.
->1242 rpm
1 R ->1242 rpm
The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations, EXT1 or
EXT2. Depending on the user selection, either one is active at a time. This function
operates on a 12 ms time level.
Settings
Panel key
Additional information
LOC/REM
Parameter
11.02
10.01
11.03
10.02
11.06
Group 98 OPTION
MODULES
Diagnostics
Program features
Actual signals
Additional information
01.11, 01.12
03.02
45
DI1 / Std IO
Select
DI6
DI6 / Std IO
DI7 to DI9
DI1 / DIO ext 1
DI2 / DIO ext 1
DI1 / DIO ext 2
DI2 / DIO ext 2
Fieldbus adapter slot 1
CH0 / RDCO board
Standard Modbus Link
Control panel
10.01
EXT1
Start/stop/
direction
I/O Extensions
See group 98
OPTION
MODULES.
Fb. selection
See chapter
Fieldbus control.
COMM.
CW
KEYPAD
DI1 / Std IO = Digital input DI1 on the standard I/O terminal block
DI1 / DIO ext 1 = Digital input DI1 on the digital I/O extension module 1
Select
AI5, AI6
DI11, DI12
11.03
EXT1
Reference
REF1 (rpm)
I/O Extensions
See parameter
group 98 OPTION
MODULES.
Fb. selection
See chapter
Fieldbus control.
COMM.
REF
KEYPAD
AI1 / Std IO = Analogue input AI1 on the standard I/O terminal block
AI1 / AIO ext = Analogue input AI1 on the analogue I/O extension module
Program features
46
Additional information
Group 11 REFERENCE
SELECT
Group 20 LIMITS
Operating limits
Group 22 ACCEL/DECEL
Group 32 SUPERVISION
Reference supervision
Diagnostics
Actual signal
Additional information
01.11, 01.12
Group 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS The reference values in different stages of the reference processing
chain.
Parameter
Program features
Group 15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
Reference value
47
Reference trimming
In reference trimming, the external %-reference (External reference REF2) is
corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable.
The block diagram below illustrates the function.
Switch
Select
max.freq
Select
DIRECT (3)
max.torque
max.speed
Select
99.04 (DTC)
%ref
40.18
AI1
AI2
...
40.16
PROPOR. (2)
OFF (1)
40.14
PID
40.15
Actual Values
40.05 .
.
.
40.07
Filter
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI5
AI6
IMOT
tref
40.01 k
40.02 ti
40.03 td
i
40.04 dFiltT
40.05 errVInv
40.13 rInt
PIDmax oh1
PIDmin ol1
Add
Mul.
%ref
%ref
Mul.
40.17
40.19
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
40.1440.18
40.0140.13, 40.19
Group 20 LIMITS
Program features
48
Example
The drive runs a conveyor line. It is speed-controlled but the line tension also needs
to be taken into account: If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint, the
speed will be slightly decreased, and vice versa.
To accomplish the desired speed correction, the user:
activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the
measured tension to it
tunes the trimming to a suitable level.
Speed controlled conveyor line
Program features
PID
Trimmed
speed reference
49
Cycle
AI / standard
6 ms
AI / extension
6 ms (100 ms 1))
1)
Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function. See group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
30.01
Supervision of AI loss
Group 40 PID
CONTROL
35.01
40.15
42.07
98.06
98.13
98.14
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
01.38, 01.39
Group 09 ACTUAL
SIGNALS
Program features
50
Cycle
AO / standard
24 ms
AO / extension
24 ms (1000 ms 1) )
1)
Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function. See group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Group 15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
30.20
30.22
Group 96 EXTERNAL
AO
Group 98 OPTION
MODULES
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
01.22, 01.23
01.28, 01.29
Warning
IO CONFIG (FF8B)
Program features
51
Cycle
DI / standard
6 ms
DI / extension
12 ms
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Group 10 START/STOP/
DIR
Group 11 REFERENCE
SELECT
Group 12 CONSTANT
SPEEDS
22.01
30.03
30.05
30.22
40.20
42.02
98.0396.05
98.0998.11
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
01.17
01.40
Warning
IO CONFIG (FF8B)
Fault
I/O COMM ERR (7000)
Program features
52
Cycle
RO / standard
100 ms
RO / extension
100 ms
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS
30.20
Group 42 BRAKE
CONTROL
Group 98 OPTION
MODULES
Diagnostics
Program features
Actual value
Additional information
01.21
01.41
53
Actual signals
Several actual signals are available:
Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power
Motor speed and torque
Mains voltage and intermediate circuit DC voltage
Active control location (Local, EXT1 or EXT2)
Reference values
Drive temperature
Operating time counter (h), kWh counter
Digital I/O and Analogue I/O status
PID controller actual values (if the PID Control macro is selected)
Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the control panel display. It is also
possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the
analogue outputs.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Group 15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
Group 92 D SET TR
ADDR
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Group 01 ACTUAL
SIGNALS 09
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Motor identification
The performance of Direct Torque Control is based on an accurate motor model
determined during the motor start-up.
A motor Identification Magnetisation is automatically done the first time the start
command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetised at zero speed
for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification
method is suitable for most applications.
In demanding applications a separate Identification Run can be performed.
Settings
Parameter 99.10.
Program features
54
fout UDC
TM
(Nm) (Hz) (V d.c.)
160
80
520
120
60
390
80
40
260
40
20
130
Umains
UDC
fout
TM
1.6
4.8
8
11.2
14.4
UDC= Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = output frequency of the drive,
TM = Motor torque
t(s)
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the
minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the mains is switched off. The drive
runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the
motor has enough kinetic energy.
Note: Cabinet assembled units equipped with main contactor option have a hold
circuit that keeps the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break.
The allowed duration of the break is adjustable. The factory setting is five seconds.
Automatic Start
Since the drive can detect the state of the motor within a few milliseconds, the
starting is immediate under all conditions. There is no restart delay. E.g. the starting
of turbining pumps or windmilling fans is easy.
Settings
Parameter 21.01.
Program features
55
DC Magnetising
When DC Magnetising is activated, the drive automatically magnetises the motor
before starting. This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque, up
to 200% of motor nominal torque. By adjusting the premagnetising time, it is possible
to synchronise the motor start and e.g. a mechanical brake release. The Automatic
Start feature and DC Magnetising cannot be activated at the same time.
Settings
Parameters 21.01 and 21.02.
DC Hold
By activating the motor DC Hold feature it is possible to
lock the rotor at zero speed. When both the reference
and the motor speed fall below the preset DC hold
speed, the drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC
into the motor. When the reference speed again exceeds
the DC hold speed, the normal drive operation resumes.
Motor
Speed
DC Hold
DC hold
speed
Speed
Reference
Settings
DC hold
speed
Flux Braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetisation in
the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during
braking can be converted to motor thermal energy. This feature is useful in motor
power ranges below 15 kW.
TBr
TN (%)
Motor
Speed
No Flux Braking
60
40
Flux Braking
20
Flux Braking
No Flux Braking
t (s)
f (Hz)
50 HZ / 60 Hz
Program features
56
80
Rated Motor Power
1
2
3
4
5
2.2 kW
15 kW
37 kW
75 kW
250 kW
40
2
3
5
10
20
30
40
f (Hz)
50
40
f (Hz)
50
120
1
80
2
40
0
Flux Braking
3
4
5
10
20
30
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during the Flux Braking.
Therefore, Flux Braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing
the speed. The other benefits of Flux Braking are:
The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does
not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
The cooling of the motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases
during the Flux Braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more
efficiently than the rotor.
Settings
Parameter 26.02.
Flux Optimisation
Flux Optimisation reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when
the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive)
can be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque and speed.
Settings
Parameter 26.01.
Program features
57
Motor speed
Linear
S-curve
2 t (s)
Critical speeds
A Critical Speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid
certain motor speeds or speed bands because of e.g. mechanical resonance
problems.
Settings
Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS.
Constant speeds
It is possible to predefine 15 constant speeds. Constant speeds are selected with
digital inputs. Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference.
This function operates on a 6 ms time level.
Settings
Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS.
Program features
58
A: Undercompensated
B: Normally tuned (autotuning)
C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B
D: Overcompensated speed controller
The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller
output is the reference for the torque controller.
Derivative
acceleration
compensation
Speed
reference
+
-
Error
value
Proportional,
integral
Derivative
Calculated actual speed
Settings
Parameter group 23 SPEED CTRL and 20 LIMITS.
Diagnostics
Actual signal 01.02.
Program features
+ Torque
+ reference
59
No Pulse
Encoder
With Pulse
Encoder
+ 0.01%
Dynamic speed
error
0.1 %sec.*
0.4 %sec.*
Tload
100
t (s)
0.1 - 0.4 %sec
nact-nref
nN
No Pulse
Encoder
With Pulse
Encoder
Linearity error
+ 4%*
+ 3%
Repeatability
error
+ 3%*
+ 1%
1 to 5 ms
1 to 5 ms
T (%)
TN
100
90
Tref
Tact
t(s)
Program features
60
Scalar control
It is possible to select Scalar Control as the motor control method instead of Direct
Torque Control (DTC). In the Scalar Control mode, the drive is controlled with a
frequency reference. The outstanding performance of the default motor control
method, Direct Torque Control, is not achieved in Scalar Control.
It is recommended to activate the Scalar Control mode in the following special
applications:
In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if
the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after
the motor identification
If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of
the drive
If the drive is used without a motor connected (e.g. for test purposes)
The drive runs a medium voltage motor via a step-up transformer.
In the Scalar Control mode, some standard features are not available.
Settings
Parameter 99.04.
Program features
f (Hz)
61
Program features
62
Motor
Current 150
(%)
100
Break point
Motor load curve
50
Temp.
Rise
100%
63%
Program features
63
Stall Protection
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision
limits (torque, frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall
condition (warning indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
The torque and current limits, which define the stall limit, must be set according to
the maximum load of the used application. Note: Stall limit is restricted by internal
current limit 03.04 TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM.
When the application reaches the stall limit and the output frequency of the drive is
below the stall frequency: Fault is activated after the stall time delay.
Settings
Parameters 30.10 to 30.12.
Parameters 20.03, 20.13 and 20.14 (Define the stall limit.)
Underload Protection
Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The drive provides an
underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault
condition. Supervision limits - underload curve and underload time - can be chosen
as well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition (warning
indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
Settings
Parameters 30.13 to 30.15.
Motor Phase Loss
The Phase Loss function monitors the status of the motor cable connection. The
function is useful especially during the motor start: the drive detects if any of the
motor phases is not connected and refuses to start. The Phase Loss function also
supervises the motor connection status during normal operation.
Settings
Parameter 30.16.
Program features
64
Preprogrammed faults
Overcurrent
The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 1.65 to 2.17 Imax depending on the drive
type.
DC overvoltage
The DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 U1max, where U1max is the maximum value of the
mains voltage range. For 400 V units, U1max is 415 V. For 500 V units, U1max is 500
V. For 690 V units, U1max is 690 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit
corresponding to the mains voltage trip level is 728 VDC for 400 V units, 877 VDC
for 500 V units, and 1210 VDC for 690 V units.
Program features
65
DC undervoltage
The DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.6 U1min, where U1min is the minimum value of
the mains voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units, U1min is 380 V. For 690 V units,
U1min is 525 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the
mains voltage trip level is 307 VDC for 400 V and 500 V units, and 425 VDC for
690 V units.
Drive temperature
The drive supervises the inverter module temperature. There are two supervision
limits: warning limit and fault trip limit.
Enhanced drive temperature monitoring for ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame sizes
R7 and R8
Traditionally, drive temperature monitoring is based on the power semiconductor
(IGBT) temperature measurement which is compared with a fixed maximum IGBT
temperature limit. However, certain abnormal conditions such as cooling fan failure,
insufficient cooling air flow or excessive ambient temperature might cause
overheating inside the converter module, which the traditional temperature
monitoring alone does not detect. The Enhanced drive temperature monitoring
improves the protection in these situations.
The function monitors the converter module temperature by checking cyclically that
the measured IGBT temperature is not excessive considering the load current,
ambient temperature, and other factors that affect the temperature rise inside the
converter module. The calculation uses an experimentally defined equation that
simulates the normal temperature changes in the module depending on the load.
Drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the limit, and trips when
temperature exceeds the limit by 5C.
Note: The monitoring is available only for ACS800-U2, -U4 and -U7, frame sizes R7
and R8 with Standard Control Program version ASXR730U (and later versions).
Types to which the enhanced drive temperature monitoring is available:
ACS800-Ux -0080-2
-0100-2
-0120-2
-0140-2/3/7
-0170-2/3/5/7
-0210-2/3/5/7
-0230-2
-0260-2/3/5/7
-0270-5
-0300-2/5
-0320-3/5/7
-0400-3/5/7
-0440-3/5/7
Program features
66
-0490-3/5/7
-0550-5/7
-0610-5/7
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Ambient temperature
Diagnostics
Warning/Fault
Additional information
INV OVERTEMP
Short circuit
There are separate protection circuits for supervising the motor cable and the
inverter short circuits. If a short circuit occurs, the drive will not start and a fault
indication is given.
Input phase loss
Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the mains cable connection status by
detecting intermediate circuit ripple. If a phase is lost, the ripple increases. The drive
is stopped and a fault indication is given if the ripple exceeds 13%.
Control board temperature
The drive supervises the control board temperature. A fault indication CTRL B TEMP
is given, if the temperature exceeds 88C.
Overfrequency
If the drive output frequency exceeds the preset level, the drive is stopped and a
fault indication is given. The preset level is 50 Hz over the operating range absolute
maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar
Control active).
Internal fault
If the drive detects an internal fault, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is
given.
Operation limits
ACS800 has adjustable limits for speed, current (maximum), torque (maximum) and
DC voltage.
Settings
Parameter group 20 LIMITS.
Program features
67
Power limit
Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit.
If the maximum allowed power is exceeded, the drive torque is automatically limited.
Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware.
For specific values refer to the appropriate hardware manual.
Automatic resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage
and analogue input below a minimum faults. The Automatic Resets must be
activated by the user.
Settings
Parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET.
Supervisions
The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the userdefined limits. The user may set limits for speed, current etc.
The supervision functions operate on a 100 ms time level.
Settings
Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
Diagnostics
Actual Signals
Additional information
03.02
03.04
03.14
Group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS
Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock.
Settings
Parameters 16.02 and 16.03.
Program features
68
Example:
Pressure boost pump
PID
%ref
40.01
40.02
40.03
A C S 6 0 0
ACS800
A C T
P A R
F U N C
L O C
R E S E T
R E F
Actual Values
D R IV E
E N T E R
R E M
3
2
0 ...1 0 b a r
4 ...2 0 m A
40.06 .
..
40.12
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI5
AI6
IMOT
Filter
40.19
40.04
40.05
40.13
PIDmax
PIDmin
ref
k
ti
td
i
dFiltT
errVInv
rInt
oh1
ol1
Switch
Frequency
reference
Speed
reference
99.04 = 0
(DTC)
Program features
69
Settings
Parameter
Purpose
99.02
40.01...40.13, 40.19,
40.25...40.27
32.13...32.18
The supervision limits for the process reference REF2 and the variables
ACT1 and ACT2
Diagnostics
Actual Signals
Purpose
Group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS
Group 15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
Group 96 EXTERNAL
AO
Compare
Mot.speed
1<2
40.21
Select
0
INTERNAL
Delay
And
DI1
..
.
40.20
%refActive
PIDCtrlActive
modulating
Set/Reset
&
S/R
40.22
1)
Or
03.02 (B1)
03.02 (B2)
<1
StartRq
Compare
01.34
1<2
40.23
Select
INTERNAL
DI1
...
Delay
Or
<1
1)
1 = Activate
sleeping
0 = Deactivate
sleeping
t
40.20
40.24
Program features
70
Example
The time scheme below visualises the operation of the sleep function.
Motor Speed
td
Sleep level
Par. 40.21
Text on display
SLEEP MODE
START
STOP
Actual Value
Time
Wake-up level
Parameter 42.23
Time
twd = Wake-up delay, parameter 40.24
Actual Value
twd
Time
Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump: The water consumption
falls at night. As a consequence, the PID process controller decreases the motor
speed. However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the
centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor does not stop but keeps rotating. The
sleep function detects the slow rotation, and stops the unnecessary pumping after
the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the
pressure. The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum
level and the wake-up delay has passed.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
99.02
40.05
Inversion
40.20...40.24
Diagnostics
Warning SLEEP MODE on the panel display.
Program features
71
RMIO board
One sensor
Motor
AI1+
AI1-
T
AO1+
AO110 nF
(> 630 VAC)
Three sensors
RMIO board
AI1+
Motor
T
AI1T
AO1+
AO1-
10 nF
(> 630 VAC)
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor
to the RMIO board, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts
and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of
8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement:
The RMIO board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not
be connected to other equipment.
Or
The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RMIO board terminals.
See also section Motor Thermal Protection on page 62.
Program features
72
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
15.01
35.0135.03
Other
Parameters 13.01 to 13.05 (AI1 processing) and 15.02 to 15.05 (AO1 processing) are not effective.
At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible,
the shield is to be left unconnected.
Diagnostics
Actual values
Additional information
01.35
Temperature value
Warnings
MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set alarm limit.
T MEAS ALM (FF91)
Faults
MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set fault limit.
Program features
73
One sensor
Motor
AI1+
AI1-
T
AO1+
10 nF
(> 630 VAC)
AO1-
SHLD
Three sensors
RAIO module
AI1+
Motor
T
AI1T
10 nF
(> 630 VAC)
AO1+
AO1-
SHLD
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor
to the RAIO module, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live
parts and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage
distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the
requirement:
The RAIO module terminals must be protected against contact and they may not
be connected to other equipment.
Or
The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RAIO module terminals.
See also section Motor Thermal Protection on page 62.
Program features
74
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
35.01 35.03
98.12
Other
Parameters 13.16 to 13.20 (AI1 processing) and 96.01 to 96.05 (AO1 signal selection and processing)
are not effective.
At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible,
the shield is to be left unconnected.
Diagnostics
Actual values
Additional information
01.35
Temperature value
Warnings
MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set alarm limit
T MEAS ALM (FF91)
Faults
MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Measured motor temperature has exceeded the set fault limit
Program features
75
Brake control
hardware
230 VAC
Emergency
brake
RMIO board
X25
1
RO1
RO1
RO1
X22
5
DI5
+24 V
M
Motor
Mechanical brake
Program features
76
Start command
External speed
reference
Inverter modulating
tmd
Motor magnetised
2
tcd
Open brake
command
4
Internal speed
reference (actual
motor speed)
tod 3
ncs
Torque reference
Ts
time
Program features
Ts
tmd
tod
ncs
tcd
77
State shifts
From any state
(rising edge)
1)
NO
MODULATION
0/0/1
2)
OPEN
BRAKE
1/1/1
3)
A
5)
RELEASE RFG
INPUT
1/1/0
4)
RFG INPUT
TO ZERO
1/1/1
7)
10)
State (Symbol
6)
CLOSE
BRAKE
11)
12)
0/1/1
A
13)
8)
BRAKE
ACK FAULT
NN
X/Y/Z
9)
0/0/1
Program features
78
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
14.01
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
03.01
03.13
Warnings
BRAKE ACKN (FF74)
Faults
BRAKE ACKN (FF74)
- Speed-controlled Master
- Speed-controlled Master
External control
signals
Supply
Follower fault 2
supervision
Supply
n
Supply
3
Master/
2 Follower Link
3
3
3
3
Follower fault 2
supervision
2 Master/Follower
Link
3
Supply
Additional information
Group 60 MASTER/
FOLLOWER
Master/Follower parameters
Other
Master/Follower Application Guide [3AFE64590430 (English)] explains the functionality in further
detail.
Program features
79
Jogging
The jogging function is typically used to control a cyclical movement of a machine
section. One push button controls the drive through the whole cycle: When it is on,
the drive starts, accelerates to a preset speed at a preset rate. When it is off, the
drive decelerates to zero speed at a preset rate.
The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive. They also represent
how the drive shifts to normal operation (= jogging inactive) when the drive start
command is switched on. Jog cmd = State of the jogging input, Start cmd = State of
the drive start command.
The function operates on a 100 ms time level.
Speed
Phase
10 11
12 13 14 15 16 Time
Jog
cmd
Start
cmd
Description
1-2
2-3
3-4
Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
4-5
Drive is stopped.
5-6
Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
6-7
7-8
Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the
active acceleration ramp.
Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows the speed reference.
8-9
9-10
10-11
Drive is stopped.
11-12
Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the
active acceleration ramp.
12-13
13-14
Drive decelerates to the jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
14-15
15-16
Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
Program features
80
Additional information
10.06
12.15
Jogging speed
21.10
Switch off delay for the inverter IGBT control. A delay keeps the inverter
modulation live over a short standstill period enabling a smooth restart.
22.04, 22.05
22.06
Acceleration and deceleration ramp shape time: Set to zero during the
jogging.
Additional information
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
04.01
Faults
INT CONFIG
Program features
81
50 Hz
100 Hz
Overload
Overload supervision can be applied to the user load curve by setting parameters
72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT... 72.20 COOLING TIME according to the overload
values defined by the motor manufacturer.
The supervision is based on an integrator, I2dt. Whenever the drive output current
exceeds the user load curve, the integrator is started. When the integrator has
reached the overload limit defined by parameters 72.18 and 72.19, the drive reacts
as defined by parameter 72.01 OVERLOAD FUNC. The output of the integrator is
set to zero if the current stays continuously below the user load curve for the cooling
time defined by parameter 72.20 COOLING TIME.
If the overload time 72.19 LOAD THERMAL TIME is set to zero, the drive output
current is limited to the user load curve.
Current
72.20
COOLING TIME
Overload
Ioutput
Iuser curve
Frequency / Time
Program features
82
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
02.20
Warnings
Additional information
USER L CURVE
Faults
USER L CURVE
Program features
83
Application macros
Chapter overview
This chapter describes the intended use, operation and the default control
connections of the standard application macros. It also describes how to save a user
macro, and how to recall it.
Overview of macros
Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets. While starting up the drive,
the user typically selects one of the macros - the one that is best suited to his needs
- by parameter 99.02, makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user
macro.
There are five standard macros and two user macros. The table below contains a
summary of the macros and describes suitable applications.
Macro
Suitable Applications
Factory
Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant speeds
are used:
- Conveyors
- Speed-controlled pumps and fans
- Test benches with predefined constant speeds
Hand/Auto
PID Control
Process control applications e.g. different closed loop control systems such as
pressure control, level control, and flow control. For example:
- pressure boost pumps of municipal water supply systems
- level controlling pumps of water reservoirs
- pressure boost pumps of district heating systems
- material flow control on a conveyor line.
It is also possible to switch between process and speed control.
Torque
Control
Sequential
Control
Speed control applications in which speed reference, seven constant speeds and
two acceleration and deceleration ramps can be used.
User
The user can save the customised standard macro i.e. the parameter settings
including group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent
memory, and recall the data at a later time. Two user macros are essential when
switching between two different motors is required
Application macros
84
Factory macro
All drive commands and reference settings can be given from the control panel or
from an external control location. The active control location is selected with the
LOC/REM key of the panel. The drive is speed-controlled.
In external control, the control location is EXT1. The reference signal is connected to
analogue input AI1 and Start/Stop and Direction signals are connected to digital
inputs DI1 and DI2. By default, the direction is fixed to FORWARD (parameter
10.03). DI2 does not control the direction of rotation unless parameter 10.03 is
changed to REQUEST.
Three constant speeds are selected by digital inputs DI5 and DI6. Two acceleration/
deceleration ramps are preset. The acceleration and deceleration ramps are used
according to the state of digital input DI4.
Two analogue signals (speed and current) and three relay output signals (ready,
running and inverted fault) are available.
The default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT
and POWER.
Application macros
85
5)
DI6
0
0
1
1
rpm
Operation
Set speed through AI1
Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 3
Fault
X20
1
2
X21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
X23
1
2
X25
1
2
3
X26
1
2
3
X27
1
2
3
VREF
GND
VREF
GND
AI1+
AI1AI2+
AI2AI3+
AI3AO1+
AO1AO2+
AO2-
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
+24 V
+24 V
DGND1
DGND2
DI IL
Digital ground
Digital ground
Start interlock (0 = stop) 5)
+24 V
GND
RO11
RO12
RO13
Relay output 1
RO21
RO22
RO23
Relay output 2
R031
R032
R033
Relay output 3
Ready
Running
Inverted fault
Application macros
86
Hand/Auto macro
Start/Stop and Direction commands and reference settings can be given from one of
two external control locations, EXT1 (Hand) or EXT2 (Auto). The Start/Stop/Direction
commands of EXT1 (Hand) are connected to digital inputs DI1 and DI2, and the
reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1. The Start/Stop/Direction
commands of EXT2 (Auto) are connected to digital inputs DI5 and DI6, and the
reference signal is connected to analogue input AI2. The selection between EXT1
and EXT2 is dependent on the status of digital input DI3. The drive is speed
controlled. Speed reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands can be given
from the control panel keypad also. One constant speed can be selected through
digital input DI4.
Speed reference in Auto Control (EXT2) is given as a percentage of the maximum
speed of the drive.
Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. The
default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT and
CTRL LOC.
Application macros
87
rpm
Fault
X20
1
2
X21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
X23
1
2
X25
1
2
3
X26
1
2
3
X27
1
2
3
VREF
GND
VREF
GND
AI1+
AI1AI2+
AI2AI3+
AI3AO1+
AO1AO2+
AO2-
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
+24 V
+24 V
DGND1
DGND2
DI IL
+24 V
GND
RO11
RO12
RO13
Ready
Relay output 1
RO21
RO22
RO23
Running
R031
R032
R033
Inverted fault
Relay output 2
Relay output 3
Application macros
88
420 mA
P
I
Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output. Thus the output signal must
be 420 mA, not 020 mA.
Application macros
89
PT
5)
4)
5)
Fault
X20
1
2
X21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
X23
1
2
X25
1
2
3
X26
1
2
3
X27
1
2
3
VREF
GND
VREF
GND
AI1+
AI1AI2+
AI2AI3+
AI3AO1+
AO1AO2+
AO2-
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
+24 V
+24 V
DGND1
DGND2
DI IL
+24 V
GND
Digital ground
Digital ground
Start interlock (0 = stop) 4)
RO11
RO12
RO13
Ready
RO21
RO22
RO23
Running
R031
R032
R033
Relay output 1
Relay output 2
Relay output 3
Inverted fault
Application macros
90
Application macros
91
rpm
Fault
X20
1
2
X21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
X23
1
2
X25
1
2
3
X26
1
2
3
X27
1
2
3
VREF
GND
VREF
GND
AI1+
AI1AI2+
AI2AI3+
AI3AO1+
AO1AO2+
AO2-
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
+24 V
+24 V
DGND1
DGND2
DI IL
Stop/Start
Forward/Reverse
Speed / torque control select 1)
Constant speed 4: Par. 12.05 2)
Acceleration & deceleration select 3)
Run Enable 4)
+24 VDC, max. 100 mA
Digital ground
Digital ground
Start interlock (0 = stop) 5)
+24 V
GND
RO11
RO12
RO13
Ready
Relay output 1
RO21
RO22
RO23
Running
R031
R032
R033
Inverted fault
Relay output 2
Relay output 3
Application macros
92
Speed 2
Speed 1
Time
Accel1
Start/Stop
Accel1/Decel1
Speed 1
Speed 2
Accel2/Decel2
Speed 3
Application macros
Accel1
Accel2
Decel2
93
3)
DI5
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
DI6
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Operation
Set speed through AI1
Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 3
Speed 4
Speed 5
Speed 6
Speed 7
rpm
Fault
X20
1
2
X21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
X23
1
2
X25
1
2
3
X26
1
2
3
X27
1
2
3
VREF
GND
VREF
GND
AI1+
AI1AI2+
AI2AI3+
AI3AO1+
AO1AO2+
AO2-
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
+24 V
+24 V
DGND1
DGND2
DI IL
Stop/Start
Forward/Reverse
Acceleration & deceleration selection 1)
Constant speed select 2)
Constant speed select 2)
Constant speed select 2)
+24 VDC, max. 100 mA
Digital ground
Digital ground
Start interlock (0 = stop) 3)
+24 V
GND
RO11
RO12
RO13
Ready
Relay output 1
RO21
RO22
RO23
Running
R031
R032
R033
Inverted fault
Relay output 2
Relay output 3
Application macros
94
User macros
In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to create two user
macros. The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including
Group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory, and
recall the data at a later time. The panel reference is also saved, if the macro is
saved and loaded in Local control mode. Remote control location setting is saved
into the user macro, but Local control location setting is not.
To create User Macro 1:
Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if not performed yet.
Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification by
changing parameter 99.02 to USER 1 SAVE (press ENTER). The storing takes 20
s to 1 min.
Note: If user macro save function is executed several times, drive memory fills up
and file compression starts. File compression can last up to 10 minutes. Macro
saving will be completed after the file compression. (Operation is indicated on the
last row of the control panel display by blinking dots).
To recall the user macro:
Change parameter 99.02 to USER 1 LOAD.
Press ENTER to load.
The user macro can also be switched via digital inputs (see parameter 16.05).
Note: User macro load restores also the motor settings in group 99 START-UP
DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that the settings correspond
to the motor used.
Example: The user can switch the drive between two motors without having to
adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the
motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor
identification once for both motors and then to save the data as two user macros.
When the motor is changed, only the corresponding User macro needs to be loaded,
and the drive is ready to operate.
Application macros
95
Definition
Absolute Maximum
Frequency
Absolute Maximum
Speed
Actual signal
FbEq
Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel
and the integer used in serial communication.
Parameter
96
No.
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01.01
PROCESS VARIABLE
1=1
01.02
SPEED
-20000 =
-100% 20000
= 100% of
motor abs.
max. speed
01.03
FREQUENCY
-100 = -1 Hz
100 = 1 Hz
01.04
CURRENT
10 = 1 A
01.05
TORQUE
Calculated motor torque. 100 is the motor nominal torque. Filter time
setting by parameter 34.05.
-10000 =
-100% 10000
= 100% of
motor nom.
torque
01.06
POWER
-1000 =
-100% 1000 =
100% of motor
nom. power
1=1V
01.07
DC BUS VOLTAGE V
01.08
MAINS VOLTAGE
1=1V
01.09
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1=1V
01.10
ACS800 TEMP
10 = 1%
01.11
EXTERNAL REF 1
1 = 1 rpm
01.12
EXTERNAL REF 2
01.13
CTRL LOCATION
Active control location. (1,2) LOCAL; (3) EXT1; (4) EXT2. See section
Local control vs. external control on page 43.
See descr.
01.14
OP HOUR COUNTER
1=1h
01.15
KILOWATT HOURS
kWh counter. Counts inverter output kWh during operation (motor side generator side).
1 = 100 kWh
01.16
Application block output signal. E.g. the process PID controller output
when the PID Control macro is active.
0 = 0% 10000
= 100%
01.17
DI6-1 STATUS
Status of digital inputs. Example: 0000001 = DI1 is on, DI2 to DI6 are off.
01.18
AI1 [V]
1 = 0.001 V
01.19
AI2 [mA]
1 = 0.001 mA
01.20
AI3 [mA]
1 = 0.001 mA
01.21
RO3-1 STATUS
01.22
AO1 [mA]
1 =0.001 mA
97
No.
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
01.23
AO2 [mA]
1 = 0.001 mA
01.24
ACTUAL VALUE 1
Feedback signal for the process PID controller. Updated only when
parameter 99.02 = PD CTRL
0 = 0% 10000
= 100%
01.25
ACTUAL VALUE 2
Feedback signal for the process PID controller. Updated only when
parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
0 = 0% 10000
= 100%
01.26
CONTROL DEVIATION
Deviation of the process PID controller, i.e. the difference between the
reference value and the actual value. Updated only when parameter
99.02 = PID CTRL.
-10000 =
-100% 10000
= 100%
01.27
APPLICATION MACRO
See 99.02
01.28
1 = 0.001 mA
01.29
1 = 0.001 mA
01.30
PP 1 TEMP
1 = 1C
01.31
PP 2 TEMP
01.32
PP 3 TEMP
01.33
PP 4 TEMP
01.34
ACTUAL VALUE
0 = 0%
10000 = 100%
01.35
MOTOR 1 TEMP
1 = 1C/ohm
01.36
MOTOR 2 TEMP
1 = 1C/ohm
01.37
1 = 1C
01.38
AI5 [mA]
Value of analogue input AI5 read from AI1 of the analogue I/O extension 1 = 0.001 mA
module (optional). A voltage signal is also displayed in mA (instead of V).
01.39
AI6 [mA]
Value of analogue input AI6 read from AI2 of the analogue I/O extension 1 = 0.001 mA
module (optional). A voltage signal is also displayed in mA (instead of V).
01.40
DI7-12 STATUS
Status of digital inputs DI7 to DI12 read from the digital I/O extension
modules (optional). E.g. value 000001: DI7 is on, DI8 to DI12 are off.
01.41
EXT RO STATUS
Status of the relay outputs on the digital I/O extension modules (optional). 1 = 1
E.g. value 0000001: RO1 of module 1 is energised. Other relay outputs
are de-energised.
01.42
1=1
01.43
Motor run time counter. The counter runs when the inverter modulates.
Can be reset by parameter 34.06.
1 = 10 h
01.44
FAN ON-TIME
1 = 10 h
1=1
1 = 1C
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS
02.01
SPEED REF 2
0 = 0% 20000
= 100% of
motor
absolute max.
speed
98
No.
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
02.02
SPEED REF 3
20000 = 100%
02.09
TORQUE REF 2
Speed controller output. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. 0 = 0% 10000
= 100% of
motor nominal
torque
02.10
TORQUE REF 3
10000 = 100%
02.13
10000 = 100%
02.14
FLUX REF
10000 = 100%
02.17
SPEED ESTIMATED
20000 = 100%
02.18
SPEED MEASURED
20000 = 100%
02.19
MOTOR ACCELERATIO Calculated motor acceleration from signal 01.02 MOTOR SPEED.
1=1 rpm/s.
02.20
USER CURRENT
10 = 1%
Measured motor current in percent of the user load curve current. User
load curve current is defined by parameters 72.02...72.09. See section
User load curve on page 81.
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS
03.01
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.01 MAIN CONTROL WORD on page
205.
03.02
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD on page
206.
03.03
03.04
LIMIT WORD 1
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 on page 214.
03.05
FAULT WORD 1
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.05 FAULT WORD 1 on page 214.
03.06
FAULT WORD 2
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.06 FAULT WORD 2 on page 215.
03.07
SYSTEM FAULT
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.07 SYSTEM FAULT WORD on page
216.
03.08
ALARM WORD 1
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.08 ALARM WORD 1 on page 216.
03.09
ALARM WORD 2
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.09 ALARM WORD 2 on page 217.
03.11
FOLLOWER MCW
03.13
03.14
03.15
FAULT WORD 4
03.16
ALARM WORD 4
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.16 ALARM WORD 4 on page 219.
03.17
FAULT WORD 5
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.17 FAULT WORD 5 on page 219.
03.18
ALARM WORD 5
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.18 ALARM WORD 5 on page 220.
03.19
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.19 INT INIT FAULT on page 220.
03.20
LATEST FAULT
Fieldbus code of the latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing for the codes.
03.21
2.LATEST FAULT
99
No.
Name/Value
Description
03.22
3.LATEST FAULT
FbEq
03.23
4.LATEST FAULT
03.24
5.LATEST FAULT
03.25
LATEST WARNING
03.26
2.LATEST WARNING
03.27
3.LATEST WARNING
03.28
4.LATEST WARNING
03.29
5.LATEST WARNING
03.30
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.30 LIMIT WORD INV on page 221.
03.31
ALARM WORD 6
A 16-bit data word. See section 03.31 ALARM WORD 6 on page 221.
03.32
EXT IO STATUS
Status of emergency stop and step up modules. See section 03.32 EXT
IO STATUS on page 222.
04 ACTUAL SIGNALS
04.01
A 16-bit data word. See section 04.01 FAULTED INT INFO on page 223.
04.02
INT SC INFO
2)
A 16-bit data word. See section 04.02 INT SC INFO on page 224.
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS
09.01
AI1 SCALED
20000 = 10 V
09.02
AI2 SCALED
20000 = 20
mA
09.03
AI3 SCALED
20000 = 20
mA
09.04
AI5 SCALED
20000 = 20
mA
09.05
AI6 SCALED
20000 = 20
mA
09.06
DS MCW
Control Word (CW) of the Main Reference data set received from the
master station through the fieldbus interface
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
09.07
MASTER REF1
Reference 1 (REF1) of the Main Reference data set received from the
master station through the fieldbus interface
-32768
32767
09.08
MASTER REF2
Reference 2 (REF2) of the Main Reference data set received from the
master station through the fieldbus interface
-32768
32767
09.09
AUX DS VAL1
Auxiliary data set value 1 received from the master station through the
fieldbus interface
-32768
32767
09.10
AUX DS VAL2
Auxiliary data set value 2 received from the master station through the
fieldbus interface
-32768
32767
09.11
AUX DS VAL3
Auxiliary data set value 3 received from the master station through the
fieldbus interface
-32768
32767
09.12
09.13
1) Percent of motor maximum speed / nominal torque / maximum process reference (depending on the
ACS800 macro selected).
2) The contents of these data words are detailed in chapter Fieldbus control.
100
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
10 START/STOP/DIR
10.01
EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR
Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction
commands for external control location 1 (EXT1).
NOT SEL
DI1
Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop; 1 = start. Direction is fixed
according to parameter 10.3 DIRECTION.
WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is
on.
DI1,2
3
Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. Direction through
digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03
DIRECTION must be REQUEST.
WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is
on.
DI1P,2P
Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital
input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter
10.03 DIRECTION.
DI1P,2P,3
Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital
input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction through digital input DI3. 0 = forward, 1 =
reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be
REQUEST.
DI1P,2P,3P
Pulse start forward through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start forward. Pulse start
reverse through digital input DI2. 0 -> 1: Start reverse. Pulse stop through
digital input DI3. 1 -> 0: stop. To control the direction, parameter 10.03
DIRECTION must be REQUEST.
DI6
DI6,5
KEYPAD
COMM.CW
10
DI7
11
DI7,8
12
DI7P,8P
13
DI7P,8P,9
14
DI7P,8P,9P
15
PARAM 10.04
16
DI1 F, DI2 R
Start, stop and direction commands through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
17
DI1
0
1
0
1
DI2
0
0
1
1
Operation
Stop
Start forward
Start reverse
Stop
EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR
Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction
commands for external control location 2 (EXT2).
NOT SEL
101
Index
10.03
10.04
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
DI1
DI1,2
DI1P,2P
DI1P,2P,3
DI1P,2P,3P
DI6
DI6,5
KEYPAD
COMM.CW
10
DI7
11
DI7,8
12
DI7P,8P
13
DI7P,8P,9
14
DI7P,8P,9P
15
PARAM 10.05
16
DI1 F, DI2 R
17
REF DIRECTION
Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor, or fixes the direction.
FORWARD
Fixed to forward
REVERSE
Fixed to reverse
REQUEST
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10.04 of parameter 10.01.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
- Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is
effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs.
- Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value
C to enable the constant setting.
10.05
10.06
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10.05 of parameter 10.02.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
JOG SPEED SELECT Defines the signal that activates jogging function. The operation of the jogging
is explained in section Jogging on page 79.
NOT SEL
Not selected.
DI3
1
2
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
10
DI12
11
102
Index
Name/Selection
Description
10.07
NET CONTROL
FbEq
Note: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected
(98.07).
Note: The setting is not saved in the permanent memory (will reset to zero
when power is switched off).
10.08
Inactive
Active
NET REFERENCE
Inactive
Active
11 REFERENCE
SELECT
Panel reference type, external control location selection and external reference
sources and limits
11.01
REF1 (rpm)
REF2 (%)
%-reference. The use of REF2 vary depending on the application macro. For
example, if the Torque Control macro is selected, REF2 is the torque
reference.
EXT1/EXT2 SELECT
Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects between
the two external control locations, EXT1 or EXT2.
11.02
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
EXT1
EXT1 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10.01 and
11.03.
EXT2
EXT2 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10.02 and
11.06.
COMM.CW
DI7
10
DI8
11
DI9
12
DI10
13
DI11
14
DI12
15
PARAM 11.09
16
103
Index
Name/Selection
Description
11.03
FbEq
KEYPAD
Control panel. The first line on the display shows the reference value.
AI1
Note: If the signal is bipolar (10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. (The
selection AI1 ignores the negative signal range.)
AI2
AI3
AI1/JOYST
Unipolar analogue input AI1 as joystick. The minimum input signal runs the
5
motor at the maximum reference in the reverse direction, the maximum input at
the maximum reference in the forward direction.
Note: Parameter 10.03 must have the value REQUEST.
WARNING! Minimum reference for joystick must be higher than 0.5 V.
Set parameter 13.01 to 2 V or to a value higher than 0.5 V and
analogue signal loss detection parameter 30.01 to FAULT. The drive
will stop in case the control signal is lost.
Speed Reference (REF1)
11.05
11.04
0
AI1
-11.04
-11.05
2
6
10
Par. 13.01 = 2 V, Par 13.02 = 10 V
Note: If the signal is bipolar (10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. The
selection AI1/JOYST ignores the negative signal range.
AI2/JOYST
AI1+AI3
AI2+AI3
AI1-AI3
AI2-AI3
10
AI1*AI3
11
AI2*AI3
12
MIN(AI1,AI3)
13
MIN(AI2,AI3)
14
MAX(AI1,AI3)
15
MAX(AI2,AI3)
16
DI3U,4D(R)
17
104
Index
Name/Selection
Description
DI3U,4D
Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: Reference decrease. The 18
program stores the active speed reference (not reset by a stop command or
power switch-off). Parameter 22.04 defines the rate of the reference change.
FbEq
DI5U,6D
19
COMM. REF
20
COM.REF1+AI1
21
COM.REF1*AI1
22
FAST COMM
23
- shorter communication cycle time when transferring the reference to the core
motor control program (6 ms -> 2 ms)
- the direction cannot be controlled through interfaces defined by parameters
10.01 or 10.02, nor with the control panel
- parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS is not effective
Note: If any of the following selections is true, the selection is not effective.
Instead, the operation is according to COMM. REF.
- parameter 99.02 is PID
- parameter 99.04 is SCALAR
- parameter 40.14 has value PROPORTIONAL or DIRECT
COM.REF1+AI5
COM.REF1*AI5
24
25
AI5
26
AI6
27
AI5/JOYST
28
AI6/JOYST
29
AI5+AI6
30
AI5-AI6
31
AI5*AI6
32
MIN(AI5,AI6)
33
MAX(AI5,AI6)
34
DI11U,12D(R)
35
DI11U,12D
36
PARAM 11.10
37
105
Index
Name/Selection
Description
AI1 BIPOLAR
Bipolar analogue input AI1 (-10 10 V). The figure below illustrates the use of 38
the input as the speed reference.
FbEq
Operation Range
scaled
maxREF1
Speed Reference
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST
minREF1
-minREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST
-scaled
maxREF1
-maxAI1
-minAI1
minAI1
maxAI1
=
=
=
=
Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the source signal used.
0 18000 rpm
1 18000
1
2
1
2
1
1
parameter 13.01
parameter 13.02
parameter 11.04
parameter 11.05
AI1 Range
Note: If the reference is given through fieldbus, the scaling differs from that of
an analogue signal. See chapter Fieldbus control for more information.
106
Index
Name/Selection
11.05
EXT REF1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value).
Description
FbEq
1 18000
KEYPAD
AI1
Note: If the signal is bipolar (10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. The
selection AI1 ignores the negative signal range.
AI2
AI3
AI1/JOYST
AI2/JOYST
AI1+AI3
AI2+AI3
AI1-AI3
AI2-AI3
10
AI1*AI3
11
AI2*AI3
12
MIN(AI1,AI3)
13
MIN(AI2,AI3)
14
MAX(AI1,AI3)
15
MAX(AI2,AI3)
16
DI3U,4D(R)
17
DI3U,4D
18
DI5U,6D
19
COMM. REF
20
COM.REF2+AI1
21
COM.REF2*AI1
22
FAST COMM
23
COM.REF2+AI5
24
COM.REF2*AI5
25
AI5
26
AI6
27
AI5/JOYST
28
AI6/JOYST
29
107
Index
11.07
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
AI5+AI6
30
AI5-AI6
31
AI5*AI6
32
MIN(AI5,AI6)
33
MAX(AI5,AI6)
34
DI11U,12D(R)
35
DI11U,12D
36
PARAM 11.11
37
38
AI1 BIPOLAR
Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value).
0 100%
EXT REF2 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the source signal used.
0 600%
0 6000
11.10
11.11
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.09 of parameter 11.02.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.10 of parameter 11.03.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.11 of parameter 11.06.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed selection and values. An active constant speed overrides the
drive speed reference. See section Constant speeds on page 57.
NOT SEL
DI1(SPEED1)
DI2(SPEED2)
DI3(SPEED3)
DI4(SPEED4)
108
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
DI5(SPEED5)
DI6(SPEED6)
DI1,2
DI1
0
1
0
1
DI2
0
0
1
1
DI3,4
DI5,6
10
DI1,2,3
Constant speed selection through digital input DI1, DI2 and DI3.
11
DI1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
DI2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
DI3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
DI3,4,5
12
DI4,5,6
13
DI3,4,5,6
DI2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
DI3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
DI4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
DI7(SPEED1)
15
DI8(SPEED2)
16
109
Index
12.02
12.03
12.04
12.05
12.06
12.07
12.08
12.09
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
DI9(SPEED3)
17
DI10(SPEED4)
18
DI11(SPEED5)
19
DI12 (SPEED6)
20
DI7,8
21
DI9,10
22
DI11,12
23
CONST SPEED 1
Defines speed 1. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
CONST SPEED 2
Defines speed 2. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 18000
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
CONST SPEED 3
Defines speed 3. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 18000
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
CONST SPEED 4
Defines speed 4. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 18000
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
CONST SPEED 5
Defines speed 5. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 18000
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
CONST SPEED 6
Defines speed 6. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 18000
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
CONST SPEED 7
Defines speed 7. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 18000
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
CONST SPEED 8
Defines speed 8. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 18000
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
12.10
CONST SPEED 9
Defines speed 9. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 18000
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
12.11
CONST SPEED 10
Defines speed 10. An absolute value. Does not include the direction
information.
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
12.12
CONST SPEED 11
Defines speed 11. An absolute value. Does not include the direction
information.
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
12.13
CONST SPEED 12
Defines speed 12. An absolute value. Does not include the direction
information.
0 18000
0 18000
0 18000
Note: If inching is in use, the parameter defines the inching 1 speed. The sign
is taken into account. See chapter Fieldbus control.
-18000 18000 rpm
Setting range
-18000
18000
110
Index
Name/Selection
Description
12.14
CONST SPEED 13
Defines speed 13. An absolute value. Does not include the direction
information.
FbEq
Note: If inching is in use, the parameter defines the inching 2 speed. The sign
is taken into account. See chapter Fieldbus control.
12.15
Setting range
CONST SPEED 14
Defines speed 14. An absolute value. Does not include the direction
information.
-18000
18000
Note: If the jogging function is in use, the parameter defines the jogging speed.
The sign is not taken into account. See section Jogging on page 79.
12.16
0 18000 rpm
Setting range
CONST SPEED 15
Defines speed 15 or Fault speed. The program considers the sign when used
as a fault speed by parameter 30.01 and 30.02.
Setting range
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
13.01
Defines the minimum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference,
the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting.
MINIMUM AI1
0 18000
-18000
18000
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this
value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.04.
0V
Zero volts. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analogue input signal.
2V
Two volts
TUNED VALUE
The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE.
TUNE
MAXIMUM AI1
Defines the maximum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference,
the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting.
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this
value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.05.
10 V
TUNED VALUE
The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE.
TUNE
111
Index
Name/Selection
Description
13.03
SCALE AI1
FbEq
AI3
1500 rpm 20 mA
AI1 + AI3
150 rpm
1500 rpm
90 rpm
60%
690 rpm
40%
600 rpm
0V
13.04
0 rpm
0 mA
0 1000%
Scaling range
FILTER AI1
0 32767
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 - e-t/T)
100
63
Filtered Signal
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (10 ms
time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter.
13.05
13.06
13.07
0.00 10.00 s
INVERT AI1
0 1000
NO
No inversion
YES
Inversion active. The maximum value of the analogue input signal corresponds 65535
to the minimum reference and vice versa.
MINIMUM AI2
0 mA
4 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
MAXIMUM AI2
20 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
112
Index
Name/Selection
Description
13.08
SCALE AI2
13.09
13.10
13.11
13.12
13.13
13.14
13.15
13.16
13.17
0 1000%
FILTER AI2
0.00 10.00 s
INVERT AI2
FbEq
0 32767
0 1000
NO
YES
65535
MINIMUM AI3
0 mA
4 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
MAXIMUM AI3
20 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
SCALE AI3
0 1000%
FILTER AI3
0.00 10.00 s
INVERT AI3
0 32767
0 1000
NO
YES
65535
MINIMUM AI5
0 mA
4 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
MAXIMUM AI5
13.18
13.19
20 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
SCALE AI5
0 1000%
FILTER AI5
0.00 10.00 s
0 32767
0 1000
113
Index
Name/Selection
Description
13.20
INVERT AI5
13.21
FbEq
NO
YES
65535
MINIMUM AI6
13.22
0 mA
4 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
MAXIMUM AI6
13.23
13.24
13.25
20 mA
TUNED VALUE
TUNE
SCALE AI6
0 1000%
FILTER AI6
0.00 10.00 s
INVERT AI6
0 1000
NO
YES
65535
14 RELAY OUTPUTS
14.01
0 32767
Status information indicated through the relay outputs, and the relay operating
delays. See section Programmable relay outputs on page 52.
RELAY RO1 OUTPUT Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO1. The relay energises
when the status meets the setting.
NOT USED
Not used.
READY
1
2
RUNNING
Running: Start signal on, Run Enable signal on, no active fault.
FAULT
Fault
FAULT(-1)
FAULT(RST)
Fault. Automatic reset after the autoreset delay. See parameter group 31
AUTOMATIC RESET.
STALL WARN
STALL FLT
Fault trip of the motor temperature supervision function. See parameter 30.04. 10
Fault trip by the drive temperature supervision function. Trip limit is 100%.
12
FAULT/WARN
13
11
WARNING
Warning active
14
REVERSED
15
114
Index
14.02
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
EXT CTRL
16
REF 2 SEL
17
CONST SPEED
18
DC OVERVOLT
19
DC UNDERVOLT
The intermediate circuit DC voltage has fallen below the undervoltage limit.
20
SPEED 1 LIM
21
SPEED 2 LIM
22
CURRENT LIM
Motor current at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.05 and 32.06.
23
REF 1 LIM
External reference REF1 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.11 and
32.12.
24
REF 2 LIM
External reference REF2 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.13 and
32.14.
25
TORQUE 1 LIM
26
TORQUE 2 LIM
27
STARTED
28
LOSS OF REF
29
AT SPEED
The actual value has reached the reference value. In speed control, the speed 30
error is less or equal to 10% of the nominal motor speed.
ACT 1 LIM
Process PID controller variable ACT1 at the supervision limit. See parameters 31
32.15 and 32.16.
ACT 2 LIM
Process PID controller variable ACT2 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32
32.17 and 32.18.
COMM.REF3(13)
33
PARAM 14.16
34
BRAKE CTRL
35
BC SHORT CIR
36
RELAY RO2 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO2. The relay
energises when the status meets the setting.
NOT USED
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
FAULT(-1)
FAULT(RST)
STALL WARN
STALL FLT
10
11
12
FAULT/WARN
13
WARNING
14
115
Index
14.03
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
REVERSED
15
EXT CTRL
16
REF 2 SEL
17
CONST SPEED
18
DC OVERVOLT
19
DC UNDERVOLT
20
SPEED 1 LIM
21
SPEED 2 LIM
22
CURRENT LIM
23
REF 1 LIM
24
REF 2 LIM
25
TORQUE 1 LIM
26
TORQUE 2 LIM
27
STARTED
28
LOSS OF REF
29
AT SPEED
30
ACT 1 LIM
31
ACT 2 LIM
32
COMM. REF3(14)
33
PARAM 14.17
34
BRAKE CTRL
35
BC SHORT CIR
36
RELAY RO3 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO3. The relay
energises when the status meets the setting.
NOT USED
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
FAULT(-1)
FAULT(RST)
STALL WARN
STALL FLT
10
11
12
FAULT/WARN
13
WARNING
14
REVERSED
15
EXT CTRL
16
REF 2 SEL
17
CONST SPEED
18
116
Index
14.04
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
DC OVERVOLT
19
DC UNDERVOLT
20
SPEED 1 LIM
21
SPEED 2 LIM
22
CURRENT LIM
23
REF 1 LIM
24
REF 2 LIM
25
TORQUE 1 LIM
26
TORQUE 2 LIM
27
STARTED
28
LOSS OF REF
29
AT SPEED
30
MAGN READY
31
USER 2 SEL
32
COMM. REF3(15)
33
PARAM 14.18
34
BRAKE CTRL
35
BC SHORT CIR
36
0.0 3600.0 s
Setting range. The figure below illustrates the operation (on) and release (off)
delays for relay output RO1.
0 36000
Drive status
0
1
RO1 status
14.05
14.06
14.07
14.08
14.09
tOn
tOff
tOn
14.04
tOff
14.05
tOn
0.0 3600.0 s
0.0 3600.0 s
0.0 3600.0 s
0.0 3600.0 s
0.0 3600.0 s
tOff
time
0 36000
0 36000
0 36000
0 36000
0 36000
117
Index
Name/Selection
Description
14.10
Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I/O
extension module 1 (optional, see parameter 98.03).
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
WARNING
REF 2 SEL
AT SPEED
PARAM 14.19
Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO2 of digital I/O
extension module 1 (optional, see parameter 98.03).
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
WARNING
REF 2 SEL
AT SPEED
PARAM 14.20
Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I/O
extension module 2 (optional, see parameter 98.04).
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
WARNING
REF 2 SEL
AT SPEED
PARAM 14.21
Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO2 of digital I/O
extension module 2 (optional, see parameter 98.04).
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
WARNING
REF 2 SEL
AT SPEED
PARAM 14.22
Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I/O
extension module 3 (optional, see parameter 98.05).
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
WARNING
REF 2 SEL
14.11
14.12
14.13
14.14
FbEq
118
Index
14.15
14.16
14.17
14.18
14.19
14.20
14.21
14.22
14.23
14.24
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
AT SPEED
PARAM 14.23
Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO2 of digital I/O
extension module no. 3 (optional, see parameter 98.05).
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
WARNING
REF 2 SEL
AT SPEED
PARAM 14.24
RO PTR1
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.16 of parameter 14.01.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
RO PTR2
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.17 of parameter 14.02.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
RO PTR3
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.18 of parameter 14.03.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
RO PTR4
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.19 of parameter 14.10.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
RO PTR5
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.20 of parameter 14.11.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
RO PTR6
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.21 of parameter 14.12.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
RO PTR7
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.22 of parameter 14.13.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
RO PTR8
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.23 of parameter 14.14.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
RO PTR9
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.24 of parameter 14.15.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
119
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
15.01
ANALOGUE
OUTPUT1
NOT USED
Not in use
P SPEED
Value of a user-defined process quantity derived from the motor speed. See
parameter group 34 PROCESS VARIABLE for scaling and unit selection (%;
m/s; rpm). The updating interval is 100 ms.
SPEED
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
TORQUE
POWER
DC BUS VOLT
OUTPUT VOLT
Motor voltage. 20 mA = motor rated voltage. The updating interval is 100 ms.
APPL OUTPUT
The reference which is given as an output from the application. For example, if 10
the PID Control macro is in use, this is the output of the process PID controller.
The updating interval is 24 ms.
REFERENCE
11
CONTROL DEV
The difference between the reference and the actual value of the process PID
controller. 0/4 mA = -100%, 10/12 mA = 0%, 20 mA = 100%. The updating
interval is 24 ms.
12
ACTUAL 1
13
ACTUAL 2
14
COMM.REF4
The value is read from fieldbus reference REF4. See chapter Fieldbus control. 15
M1 TEMP MEAS
15.02
PARAM 15.11
INVERT AO1
Inverts the analogue output AO1 signal. The analogue signal is at the minimum
level when the indicated drive signal is at its maximum level and vice versa.
17
NO
Inversion off
YES
Inversion on
65535
120
Index
Name/Selection
Description
15.03
MINIMUM AO1
0 mA
Zero mA
4 mA
Four mA
FILTER AO1
0.00 10.00 s
15.04
FbEq
0 1000
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 - e-t/T)
100
63
Filtered Signal
Note: Even if you select 0 s as the minimum value, the signal is still filtered
with a time constant of 10 ms due to the signal interface hardware. This cannot
be changed by any parameters.
15.05
SCALE AO1
10 1000%
Scaling factor. If the value is 100%, the reference value of the drive signal
corresponds to 20 mA.
100
10000
Example: The nominal motor current is 7.5 A and the measured maximum
current at maximum load 5 A. The motor current 0 to 5 A needs to be read as 0
to 20 mA analogue signal through AO1. The required settings are:
1. AO1 is set to CURRENT by parameter 15.01.
2. AO1 minimum is set to 0 mA by parameter 15.03.
3. The measured maximum motor current is scaled to correspond to 20 mA
analogue output signal by setting the scaling factor (k) to 150%. The value is
defined as follows: The reference value of the output signal CURRENT is the
motor nominal current i.e. 7.5 A (see parameter 15.01). To make the measured
maximum motor current correspond to 20 mA, it should be scaled equal to the
reference value before it is converted to an analogue output signal. Equation:
k 5 A = 7.5 A => k = 1.5 = 150%
15.06
ANALOGUE
OUTPUT2
NOT USED
P SPEED
SPEED
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
TORQUE
POWER
DC BUS VOLT
OUTPUT VOLT
APPL OUTPUT
10
REFERENCE
11
CONTROL DEV
12
ACTUAL 1
13
121
Index
15.07
15.08
15.09
15.10
15.11
15.12
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
ACTUAL 2
14
COMM.REF5
The value is read from fieldbus reference REF5. See chapter Fieldbus control. 15
PARAM 15.12
INVERT AO2
16
NO
YES
65535
MINIMUM AO2
0 mA
4 mA
FILTER AO2
0.00 10.00 s
SCALE AO2
10 1000%
0 1000
100
10000
AO1 PTR
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 15.11 of parameter 15.01.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
AO2 PTR
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 15.12 of parameter 15.06.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
1000 =
1 mA
1000 =
1 mA
16.01
RUN ENABLE
Sets the Run Enable signal on, or selects a source for the external Run Enable
signal. If Run Enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start or stops if it is
running. The stop mode is set by parameter 21.07.
YES
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
COMM.CW
External signal required through the Fieldbus Control Word (bit 3).
DI7
DI8
10
DI9
11
DI10
12
DI11
13
DI12
14
PARAM 16.08
15
122
Index
Name/Selection
Description
16.02
PARAMETER LOCK
Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents parameter changing.
16.03
16.04
FbEq
OPEN
LOCKED
Locked. Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel. The lock 65535
can be opened by entering the valid code to parameter 16.03.
PASS CODE
Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see parameter 16.02).
0 30000
Setting 358 opens the lock. The value reverts back to 0 automatically.
Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a
fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists.
0 30000
NOT SEL
Fault reset only from the control panel keypad (RESET key).
DI1
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
COMM.CW
Reset through the fieldbus Control Word (bit 7), or by the RESET key of the
control panel.
Note: Reset through fieldbus Control Word (bit 7) is enabled automatically and
it is independent of parameter 16.04 setting if parameter 10.01 or 10.02 is set
to COMM.CW.
16.05
ON STOP
Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital input, or by the
RESET key of the control panel.
DI7
10
DI8
11
DI9
12
DI10
13
DI11
14
DI12
15
PARAM 16.11
16
USER MACRO IO
CHG
Enables the change of the User Macro through a digital input. See parameter
99.02. The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped. During the
change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User Macro by parameter 99.02 after changing any
parameter settings, or reperforming the motor identification. The last settings
saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and
on again or the macro is changed. Any unsaved changes will be lost.
Note: The value of this parameter is not included in the User Macro. A setting
once made remains despite the User Macro change.
Note: Selection of User Macro 2 can be supervised via relay output RO3. See
parameter 14.03 for more information.
NOT SEL
DI1
Falling edge of digital input DI1: User Macro 1 is loaded into use. Rising edge
of digital input DI1: User Macro 2 is loaded into use.
123
Index
16.06
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
10
DI10
11
DI11
12
DI12
13
LOCAL LOCK
16.07
OFF
ON
65535
PARAMETER SAVE
16.08
16.09
16.10
16.11
DONE
Saving completed
SAVE..
Saving in progress
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 16.08 of parameter 16.01
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
CTRL BOARD
SUPPLY
Note: If an external supply is used but this parameter has value INTERNAL,
the drive trips on a fault at power switch off.
INTERNAL 24V
Internal (default).
EXTERNAL 24V
ASSIST SEL
OFF
Assistant disabled.
ON
Assistant enabled.
65535
Defines the source or constant for selection PARAM 16.11 of parameter 16.04.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
124
Index
Name/Selection
Description
20 LIMITS
Drive operation limits. See also section Speed controller tuning on page 58.
20.01
Defines the allowed minimum speed. The limit cannot be set if parameter
99.04 = SCALAR.
MINIMUM SPEED
FbEq
Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e.
parameter 99.08. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also
change.
20.02
MAXIMUM SPEED
Defines the allowed maximum speed. The value cannot be set if parameter
99.04 = SCALAR.
1 = 1 rpm
Note: If the value is positive, the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction.
Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e.
parameter 99.08. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also
change.
par. 20.01 18000 / Maximum speed limit
(no. of pole pairs) rpm
20.03
20.04
20.05
1 = 1 rpm
Current limit
0.0 600.0%
OVERVOLTAGE
CTRL
0 10x.x
0 60000
Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage
control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the
overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque.
Note: If a brake chopper and resistor are connected to the drive, the controller
must be off (selection NO) to allow chopper operation.
20.06
20.07
OFF
ON
65535
UNDERVOLTAGE
CTRL
OFF
ON
65535
MINIMUM FREQ
Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set
only parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
-300.00 50 Hz
If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller
will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above
the lower limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load will cause
regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC link charged and preventing
an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss
ride-through functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as a centrifuge or
a fan.
Note: If the value is positive, the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction.
20.08
MAXIMUM FREQ
Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set
only if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR
-50 300.00 Hz
-30000
5000
-5000
30000
125
Index
Name/Selection
Description
20.11
P MOTORING LIM
Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the inverter to the motor.
FbEq
0 600%
20.12
P GENERATING LIM
Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the motor to the inverter.
-600 0%
20.13
Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive. The update interval is 100 ms.
MIN LIM1
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
10
DI10
11
DI11
12
DI12
13
AI1
Analogue input AI1. See parameter 20.20 on how the signal is converted to a
torque limit.
14
AI2
15
AI3
16
AI5
17
AI6
18
PARAM 20.18
19
20
20.14
0 60000
-60000 0
1
Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive. The update interval is 100 ms.
MAX LIM1
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
10
DI10
11
DI11
12
DI12
13
AI1
Analogue input AI1. See parameter 20.20 on how the signal is converted to a
torque limit.
14
126
Index
20.15
20.16
20.17
20.18
20.19
20.20
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
AI2
15
AI3
16
AI5
17
AI6
18
PARAM 20.19
19
-600.0 0.0%
-600.0 0.0%
0.0 600.0%
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 20.18 of parameter 20.13
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
-60000 0
-60000 0
0 60000
100 = 1%
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 20.19 of parameter 20.14
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
MIN AI SCALE
100 = 1%
Torque limit
20.21
13.01
20.20
13.02
20.20
Minimum torque
20.21
Maximum torque
13.01
13.02
Analogue signal
20.21
0.0 600.0%
MAX AI SCALE
0.0 600.0%
21 START/STOP
21.01
Selects the motor starting method. See also section Automatic Start on page
54.
START FUNCTION
100 = 1%
100 = 1%
127
Index
Name/Selection
Description
AUTO
1
Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the
flying start function (starting to a rotating machine) and the automatic restart
function (stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor
flux to die away). The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as
the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all
conditions.
FbEq
CNST DC MAGN
3
Constant DC magnetising should be selected instead of DC magnetising if
constant pre-magnetising time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be
simultaneous with a mechanical brake release). This selection also guarantees
the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-magnetising time is set
long enough. The pre-magnetising time is defined by parameter 21.02.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is
selected.
Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetising time has
passed although the motor magnetisation is not completed. Ensure
always in applications where a full break-away torque is essential, that
the constant magnetising time is long enough to allow generation of full
magnetisation and torque.
21.02
21.03
30.0 10000.0 ms
Magnetising time. To ensure full magnetising, set this value to the same value
as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb
value given in the table below:
Motor Rated Power
< 10 kW
10 to 200 kW
200 to 1000 kW
STOP FUNCTION
COAST
Stop by cutting of the motor power supply. The motor coasts to a stop.
30 10000
128
Index
Name/Selection
Description
21.04
DC HOLD
FbEq
When both the reference and the speed drop below the value of parameter
21.05, the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC
into the motor. The current is set by parameter 21.06. When the reference
speed exceeds parameter 21.05, normal drive operation continues.
SPEEDmotor
DC Hold
Ref.
DC HOLD SPEED
t
Note: DC Hold has no effect if the start signal is switched off.
Note: Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up. In
applications where long DC hold times are required, externally ventilated
motors should be used. If the DC hold period is long, the DC hold cannot
prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor.
See section DC Hold on page 55.
21.05
21.06
21.07
NO
Inactive
YES
Active
65535
DC HOLD SPEED
0 3000 rpm
Speed in rpm
DC HOLD CURR
0 100%
Selects the stop mode applied when the Run Enable signal is switched off. The
Run Enable signal is put into use by parameter 16.01.
0 3000
0 100
Note: The setting overrides the normal stop mode setting (parameter 21.03)
when the Run Enable signal is switched off.
WARNING! The drive will restart after the Run Enable signal restores
(if the start signal is on).
RAMP STOP
The application program stops the drive along the deceleration ramp defined in 1
group 22 ACCEL/DECEL.
COAST STOP
The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply
(the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed.
The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply
(the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed. The
drive will restart only when the Run Enable signal is on and the start signal is
switched on (the program receives the rising edge of the start signal).
129
Index
21.08
21.09
Name/Selection
Description
OFF3 STOP
The application program stops the drive along the ramp defined by parameter 4
22.07. The drive will restart only when the Run Enable is on and the start signal
is switched on (the program receives the rising edge of the start signal).
FbEq
Activates the flying start feature in the scalar control mode. See parameters
21.01 and 99.04.
NO
Inactive
YES
Active
65535
Defines how the Start Interlock input on RMIO board affects the drive
operation.
OFF2 STOP
ZERO SPEED DELAY Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The function is useful in
applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay
the drive knows accurately the rotor position.
No Zero Speed Delay
Speed
Speed controller
switched off: Motor
coasts to stop.
Zero Speed
Time
Zero Speed
Delay Time
Delay time
10 = 1 s
22 ACCEL/DECEL
22.01
ACC/DEC SEL
ACC/DEC 1
Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are used. See parameters 22.02
and 22.03.
130
Index
22.02
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
ACC/DEC 2
Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are used. See parameters 22.04
and 22.05.
DI1
3
Acceleration/deceleration time pair selection through digital input DI1. 0 =
Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in use. 1 = Acceleration time 2
and deceleration time 2 are in use.
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
10
DI9
11
DI10
12
DI11
13
DI12
14
PAR 22.08&09
15
ACCEL TIME 1
Defines the acceleration time 1 i.e. the time required for the speed to change
from zero to the maximum speed.
- If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the acceleration rate.
- If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the reference signal.
- If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the
acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits.
22.03
0.00 1800.00 s
Acceleration time
DECEL TIME 1
Defines the deceleration time 1 i.e. the time required for the speed to change
from the maximum (see parameter 20.02) to zero.
0 18000
- If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the reference signal.
- If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate, the motor
speed will follow the deceleration rate.
- If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the
deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits. If there is any doubt
about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that the DC overvoltage
control is on (parameter 20.05).
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the
drive should be equipped with an electric braking option e.g. with a brake
chopper and a brake resistor.
22.04
22.05
0.00 1800.00 s
Deceleration time
ACCEL TIME 2
0.00 1800.00 s
DECEL TIME 2
0.00 1800.00 s
0 18000
0 18000
0 18000
131
Index
Name/Selection
Description
22.06
ACC/DEC RAMP
SHPE
FbEq
0.00 1000.00 s
0.00 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for
slow ramps.
0.01 1000.00 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for conveyors
carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is
required when changing from one speed to another. The S curve consists of
symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.
A rule of thumb
Speed
Max
S-curve ramp:
Par. 22.06 > 0 s
time
Par. 22.02
22.07
EM STOP RAMP
TIME
Par. 22.06
22.08
22.09
0.00 2000.00 s
Deceleration time
ACC PTR
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 22.08&09 of parameter 22.01.
0 200000
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
DEC PTR
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 22.08&09 of parameter 22.01
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
100 = 1 s
100 = 1 s
132
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
23 SPEED CTRL
Speed controller variables. The parameters are not visible if parameter 99.04 =
SCALAR. See section Speed controller tuning on page 58.
23.01
Defines a relative gain for the speed controller. Great gain may cause speed
oscillation.
GAIN
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when
the error remains constant.
%
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time = 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
Error Value
Controller Output
e = Error value
Controller
output = Kp e
t
23.02
0.0 250.0
Gain
INTEGRATION TIME
Defines an integration time for the speed controller. The integration time
defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is
constant. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value
is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the control unstable.
0 25000
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when
the error remains constant.
%
Controller Output
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
Kp e
e = Error value
Kp e
TI
0.01 999.97 s
Integration time
t
10
999970
133
Index
Name/Selection
Description
23.03
DERIVATION TIME
Defines the derivation time for the speed controller. Derivative action boosts
the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time,
the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the
derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise
as a PID controller.
FbEq
Kp TD
De
Ts
Controller Output
Kp e
Error Value
e = Error value
Kp e
TI
23.04
0.0 9999.8 ms
ACC
COMPENSATION
1 = 1 ms
Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100%
of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven
machine. (The speed controller Autotune Run does this automatically, see
parameter 23.06.)
The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is
accelerated along a ramp.
No Acceleration Compensation
%
t
0.00 999.98 s
Derivation time
Acceleration Compensation
%
Speed reference
Actual speed
t
0 9999
134
Index
Name/Selection
Description
23.05
SLIP GAIN
Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control. 100% means full
slip compensation; 0% means no slip compensation. The default value is
100%. Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of
the full slip compensation.
FbEq
Example: 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite of
the full slip compensation (SLIP GAIN = 100%), a manual tachometer
measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm. The static
speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip
gain should be increased. At the 106% gain value, no static speed error exists.
23.06
0.0 400.0%
AUTOTUNE RUN
0 400
23.07
NO
No autotuning.
YES
65535
Defines the time constant of the actual speed filter, i.e. time within the actual
speed has reached 63% of the nominal speed.
0...1000000 ms
Time constant
24 TORQUE CTRL
1 = 1 ms
24.01
24.02
TORQ RAMP UP
0.00 120.00 s
Time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque.
0.00 120.00 s
Time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero.
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS
Speed bands within which the drive is not allowed to operate. See section
Critical speeds on page 57.
25.01
CRIT SPEED
SELECT
0 12000
0 12000
Example: A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to
1560 rpm. To make the drive to jump over the vibration speed ranges:
- activate the critical speeds function,
- set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.
Motor speed
(rpm)
1560
1380
690
540
Note: If parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL, the critical speeds are not in use.
OFF
Inactive
ON
Active.
65535
135
Index
Name/Selection
Description
25.02
FbEq
0 18000 rpm
Minimum limit. The value cannot be above the maximum (parameter 25.03).
0 18000
0 18000 rpm
Maximum limit. The value cannot be below the minimum (parameter 25.02).
0 18000
0 18000 rpm
0 18000 rpm
0 18000 rpm
0 18000 rpm
0 18000
0 18000
0 18000
0 18000
26 MOTOR CONTROL
26.01
FLUX OPTIMIZATION Activates/deactivates the flux optimisation function. See section Flux
Optimisation on page 56.
Note: The function cannot be used if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
26.02
NO
Inactive
YES
Active
65535
FLUX BRAKING
26.03
NO
Inactive
YES
Active
65535
IR-COMPENSATION
Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR compensation). The
function is useful in applications with high break-away torque, but no DTC
motor control cannot be applied. The figure below illustrates the IR
compensation. See section IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive on
page 60.
Note: The function can be used only if parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.
U /UN
(%)
100%
15%
0 30%
0 3000
136
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
26.04
IR STEP-UP FREQ
100 = 1
26.03 IR
COMPENSATION
f (Hz)
26.04 IR STEP-UP
FREQ
Field weakening
point (FWP)
For more information, see the Sine Filters Users Manual for ACS800 Drives
[3AFE68389178 (English)].
0...50 Hz
26.05
26.06
26.07
Frequency
HEX FIELD WEAKEN Selects whether motor flux is controlled along a circular or a hexagonal pattern
in the field weakening area of the frequency range (above 50/60 Hz). See
section Hexagonal motor flux on page 61.
OFF
0
The rotating flux vector follows a circular pattern. Optimal selection in most
applications: Minimal losses at constant load. Maximal instantaneous torque is
not available in the field weakening range of the speed.
ON
Motor flux follows a circular pattern below the field weakening point (typically
50 or 60 Hz) and a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening range. Optimal
selection in the applications that require maximal instantaneous torque in the
field weakening range of the speed. The losses at constant operation are
higher than with the selection NO.
Selects the source for the flux reference, or sets the flux reference value.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
FLYSTART CUR REF Defines the current reference used with flying start (start to a rotating motor)
[%]
when no pulse encoder is used.
If flying start fails (i.e. drive is unable to detect motor speed 01.02 SPEED):
Monitor signals 01.02 SPEED and 01.04 CURRENT with DriveWindow PC tool
and increase the reference in steps of 5% until the flying start function is
successfully performed (i.e. drive is able to detect 01.02 SPEED).
See also parameter 26.08 FLYSTART INIT DLY.
0100%
Value in percent
65535
100 = 1%
1 = 1%
137
Index
Name/Selection
Description
26.08
1=1
Defines together with the motor characteristics the delay before the speed
value estimated at the beginning of flying start is connected to the speed
reference ramp output. Increase the delay, if the motor starts to rotate in the
wrong direction or if the motor starts to rotate with the wrong speed reference.
FbEq
060
Delay
FS METHOD
Activates the flux correction at low frequencies, < 3 Hz, when the torque
exceeds 30%. Effective in the motoring and generating modes.
26.10
1=1
1 = ON
Active
0 = OFF
Inactive
RS20 [mOhm]
0x mOhm
27 BRAKE CHOPPER
27.01
27.02
BRAKE CHOPPER
CTL
OFF
Inactive
ON
Active. Note: Ensure the brake chopper and resistor are installed and the
overvoltage control is switched off (parameter 20.05).
65535
BR OVERLOAD
FUNC
NO
Inactive
WARNING
1
2
FAULT
27.03
BR RESISTANCE
Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor. The value is used for brake
chopper protection.
Resistance value
27.04
BR THERM TCONST
Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor. The value is used in the
overload protection. See parameter 27.02.
0 100
With type SACE brake resistors, the parameter setting must be 200 s.
With type SAFUR brake resistors, the parameter setting must be 555 s.
0.000 10000.000 s
Time constant
27.05
MAX CONT BR
POWER
Defines the maximum continuous braking power which will raise the resistor
temperature to the maximum allowed value. The value is used in the overload
protection. See parameter 27.02.
1=1
0.00 10000 kW
Power
27.06
BC CTRL MODE
1=1
138
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
AS GENERATOR
Chopper operation is allowed when the DC voltage exceeds the braking limit,
the inverter bridge modulates and the motor generates power to the drive.
65535
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.01
Selects how the drive reacts when an analogue input signal falls below the set
minimum limit.
AI<MIN FUNCTION
Note: The analogue input minimum setting must be set to 0.5 V (1 mA) or
above (see parameter group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS).
FAULT
NO
Inactive
CONST SP 15
The drive generates a warning AI < MIN FUNC (8110) and sets the speed to
the value defined by parameter 12.16.
The drive generates a warning AI < MIN FUNC (8110) and freezes the speed 4
to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average
speed over the previous 10 seconds.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the
analogue input signal is lost.
30.02
PANEL LOSS
FAULT
Drive trips on a fault and the motor stops as defined by parameter 21.03.
CONST SP 15
The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the speed defined by
parameter 12.16.
The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to the level the drive was 3
operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous
10 seconds.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a
panel communication break.
30.03
EXTERNAL FAULT
Selects an interface for an external fault signal. See section External Fault on
page 61.
NOT SEL
Inactive
DI1
External fault indication is given through digital input DI1. 0: Fault trip. Motor
coasts to stop. 1: No external fault.
DI2
139
Index
30.04
30.05
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
10
DI10
11
DI11
12
DI12
13
MOTOR THERM
PROT
Selects how the drive reacts when the motor overtemperature is detected by
the function defined by parameter 30.05. See section Motor Thermal
Protection on page 62.
FAULT
The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning
level (95% of the allowed maximum value). The drive trips on a fault when the
temperature exceeds the fault level (100% of the allowed maximum value).
WARNING
The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning
level (95% of the allowed maximum value).
NO
Inactive
MOT THERM P
MODE
DTC
The protection is based on the calculated motor thermal model. The following
assumptions are used in the calculation:
140
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
USER MODE
The protection is based on the user-defined motor thermal model and the
following basic assumptions:
141
Index
Name/Selection
Description
THERMISTOR
FbEq
Temperature
1 (0 1.5 kohm)
Normal
0 (4 kohm or higher)
Overtemperature
DI6
+24 VDC
Motor
Alternative 2
Motor
DI6
+24 VDC
10 nF
142
Index
Name/Selection
Description
30.06
MOTOR THERM
TIME
Defines the thermal time constant for the user-defined thermal model (see the
selection USER MODE of parameter 30.05).
FbEq
Motor
Load
100%
Temperature
100%
63%
256.0 9999.8 s
Time constant
MOTOR LOAD
CURVE
Defines the load curve together by parameters 30.08 and 30.09. The load
curve is used in the user-defined thermal model (see the selection USER
MODE of parameter 30.05).
256 9999
I/IN
I = Motor current
(%)
150
100
50
30.08
30.09
30.08
30.09
50.0 150.0%
Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.09.
25.0 150.0%
Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of the nominal motor
current
BREAK POINT
Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.08.
1.0 300.0 Hz
50 150
25 150
100
30000
143
Index
Name/Selection
Description
30.10
STALL FUNCTION
Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The protection wakes up
if:
FbEq
- the drive is at stall limit (defined by parameters 20.03, 20.13 and 20.14)
- the output frequency is below the level set by parameter 30.11 and
- the conditions above have been valid longer than the time set by parameter
30.12.
Note: Stall limit is restricted by internal current limit 03.04
TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM.
See section Stall Protection on page 63.
30.11
FAULT
WARNING
The drive generates a warning. The indication disappears in half of the time set 2
by parameter 30.12.
NO
Protection is inactive.
STALL FREQ HI
Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See parameter 30.10.
0.5 50.0 Hz
Stall frequency
30.12
STALL TIME
Defines the time for the stall function. See parameter 30.10.
50 5000
10.00 400.00 s
Stall time
30.13
UNDERLOAD FUNC
Selects how the drive reacts to underload. The protection wakes up if:
10 400
- the motor torque falls below the curve selected by parameter 30.15,
- output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal motor frequency and
- the above conditions have been valid longer than the time set by parameter
30.14.
See section Underload Protection on page 63.
NO
Protection is inactive.
WARNING
2
3
FAULT
30.14
UNDERLOAD TIME
0 600 s
Underload time
30.15
UNDERLOAD
CURVE
Selects the load curve for the underload function. See parameter 30.13.
TM/TN
(%)
100
0 600
TM = Motor torque
TN= Nominal motor torque
N = Nominal motor frequency
3
80
70%
60
2
50%
40
20
30%
0
N
15
2.4 * N
15
144
Index
Name/Selection
Description
30.16
MOTOR PHASE
LOSS
30.17
30.18
FbEq
NO
Inactive
FAULT
65535
EARTH FAULT
Selects how the drive reacts when an earth fault is detected in the motor or the
motor cable. See section Earth Fault Protection on page 64.
WARNING
FAULT
65535
Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication break, i.e. when the
drive fails to receive the Main Reference Data Set or the Auxiliary Reference
Data Set. The time delays are given by parameters 30.19 and 30.21.
FAULT
Protection is active. The drive trips on a fault and stops the motor as defined by 1
parameter 21.03.
NO
Protection is inactive.
CONST SP 15
Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the
value defined by parameter 12.16.
Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to
the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average
speed over the previous 10 seconds.
30.20
MAIN REF DS T-OUT Defines the time delay for the Main Reference data set supervision. See
parameter 30.18.
0.1 60.0 s
Time delay
Selects the operation of the fieldbus controlled relay output and analogue
output in a communication break. See groups 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and 15
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS and chapter Fieldbus control. The delay for the
supervision function is given by parameter 30.21.
10 6000
ZERO
LAST VALUE
The relay output keeps the last state before the communication loss. The
analogue output gives the last value before the communication loss.
65535
AUX DS T-OUT
Defines the delay time for the Auxiliary Reference data set supervision. See
parameter 30.18. The drive automatically activates the supervision 60 seconds
after power switch-on if the value is other than zero.
Note: The delay also applies for the function defined by parameter 30.20.
30.22
0.0 60.0 s
IO CONFIG FUNC
Selects how the drive reacts in case an optional input or output channel has
been selected as a signal interface, but the communication to the appropriate
analogue or digital I/O extension module has not been set up accordingly in
parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES.
Example: The supervision function wakes up if parameter 16.01 is set to DI7,
but 98.03 is set to NO.
0 6000
145
Index
30.23
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
NO
Inactive.
WARNING
LIMIT WARNING
Activates/deactivates limit alarms INV CUR LIM, DC BUS LIM, MOT CUR LIM,
MOT TORQ LIM and/or MOT POW LIM. For more information, see chapter
Fault tracing.
0...255
Value in decimal. As default none of the alarms are active, i.e. parameter value is 0.
bit 0 INV_CUR_LIM_IND
bit 1 DC_VOLT_LIM_IND
bit 2 MOT_CUR_LIM_IND
bit 3 MOT_TORQ_LIM_IND
bit 4 MOT_POW_LIM_IND
Example: When parameter value is set to 3 (bit 0 and 1 values are 1), alarms
INV CUR LIM and DC BUS LIM are active.
31 AUTOMATIC RESET
31.01
NUMBER OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time
defined by parameter 31.02.
05
TRIAL TIME
Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See parameter 31.01.
1.0 180.0 s
31.03
DELAY TIME
Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an
automatic reset. See parameter 31.01.
0.0 3.0 s
Resetting delay
31.04
OVERCURRENT
31.02
31.05
31.06
31.07
0
100
18000
0 300
NO
Inactive
YES
Active
65535
OVERVOLTAGE
NO
Inactive
YES
Active
65535
UNDERVOLTAGE
NO
Inactive
YES
Active
65535
AI SIGNAL<MIN
NO
Inactive
YES
Active.
0
65535
WARNING! The drive may restart even after a long stop if the
analogue input signal is restored. Ensure that the use of this feature
will not cause danger.
146
Index
Name/Selection
Description
31.08
LINE CONV
Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the fault LINE CONV (FF51) (fault
on line side converter).
FbEq
NO
Inactive
YES
Active
65535
32 SUPERVISION
Supervision limits. A relay output can be used to indicate when the value is
above/below the limit. See section Supervisions on page 67.
32.01
SPEED1 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
Supervision wakes up if the value is below the set limit. The limit is supervised 4
in both rotating directions. The figure below illustrates the principle.
speed/rpm
ABS LOW LIMIT
0
-ABS LOW LIMIT
32.02
SPEED1 LIMIT
32.04
SPEED2 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
SPEED2 LIMIT
32.06
32.07
32.08
- 18000
18000
- 18000
18000
CURRENT
FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
CURRENT LIMIT
Defines the limit for the motor current supervision (see parameter 32.05).
0 1000 A
TORQUE 1
FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
TORQUE 1 LIMIT
Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision (see parameter 32.07).
-600 600%
0 1000
-6000
6000
147
Index
Name/Selection
Description
32.09
TORQUE 2
FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
TORQUE 2 LIMIT
Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision (see parameter 32.09).
-600 600%
REF1 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
REF1 LIMIT
0 18000 rpm
REF2 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
REF2 LIMIT
0 600%
ACT1 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
ACT1 LIMIT
0 200%
ACT2 FUNCTION
NO
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
ACT2 LIMIT
0 200%
32.10
32.11
32.12
32.13
32.14
32.15
32.16
32.17
32.18
FbEq
-6000
6000
0 18000
0 6000
0 2000
0 2000
33 INFORMATION
33.01
Displays the type and the version of the firmware package in the drive.
Note: Parameter setting cannot be changed by the user.
SOFTWARE
VERSION
148
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Decoding key:
ASxxxxyx
Product Series
A = ACS800
Product
S = ACS800 Standard
Firmware Version
7xyx = Version 7.xyx
33.02
APPL SW VERSION
ASAxxxyx
Product Series
A = ACS800
Product
S = ACS800 Standard
Firmware Type
A = Application Program
Firmware Version
7xyx = Version 7.xyx
33.03
TEST DATE
33.04
BOARD TYPE
Shows the control board type. Note: RMIO-1x boards have different type of
FLASH memory chips than RMIO-0x. Only software version ASXR7300 or
later will operate with the RMIO-1x boards.
SCALE
Scales the selected drive variable into a desired user-defined variable, which is
stored as an actual signal 01.01. The block diagram below illustrates the use of
the parameters that define actual signal 01.01.
PARAMETER
TABLE
00.00
Select
99.99
34.03
01.01
34.01
NO
Mul.
Select
Unit for actual
signal 01.01
FPM
34.02
0.00100000.00%
Scaling factor
0100000
149
Index
Name/Selection
Description
34.02
P VAR UNIT
Selects the unit for the process variable. See parameter 34.01.
34.03
34.04
FbEq
NO
No unit is selected.
rpm
1
2
percent
m/s
ampere
volt
Hz
hertz
second
hour
kh
kilohour
10
celsius
11
lft
12
mA
milliampere
13
mV
millivolt
14
kW
kilowatt
15
watt
16
kWh
kilowatt hour
17
fahrenheit
18
hp
horsepower
19
MWh
megawatt hour
20
m3h
21
l/s
22
bar
bar
23
kPa
kilopascal
24
GPM
25
PSI
26
CFM
27
ft
foot
28
MGD
29
iHg
inches of mercury
30
FPM
31
lbs
pound
32
SELECT P VAR
Selects the drive variable scaled into a desired process variable. See
parameter 34.01.
0 9999
Parameter index
Defines a filter time constant for actual signal 01.02 SPEED. The time constant
has an effect on all functions in which signal SPEED is used.
0 9999
The actual speed value is used e.g. in speed supervision (parameter group 32
SUPERVISION) as an analogue output value (group 15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS) or as an actual signal shown on the control panel display or PC
screen.
150
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
0 20000 ms
0 20000
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 - e-t/T)
100
63
Filtered Signal
t
T
34.05
Defines a filter time for the actual signal torque (actual signal 01.05). Affects
also on the torque supervision (parameters 32.07 and 32.09) and the torque
read through an analogue output.
0 20000 ms
0 20000
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 - e-t/T)
100
63
Filtered Signal
T
34.06
NO
No reset.
YES
65535
35.01
MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL Activates the motor 1 temperature measurement function and selects the
sensor type.
Note: If an optional analogue I/O extension module RAIO is used for the
temperature measurement and 35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL and/or 35.04
MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL are set to 1xPT100, analogue extension module input
signal range must be set to 0...2 V (instead of 0...10 V) with DIP switches.
NOT IN USE
1xPT100
The function is active. The temperature is measured with one Pt 100 sensor.
2
Analogue output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor. The sensor
resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over
the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
analogue input AI1 and converts it to degrees centigrade.
2XPT100
3XPT100
151
Index
Name/Selection
Description
1...3 PTC
The function is active. The temperature is supervised using one to three PTC 5
sensors or one to three KTY84-1xx silicon temperature sensors. Analogue
output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor(s). The resistance of the
sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the sensor
reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over the resistor. The
temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analogue input
AI1 and converts it into ohms. The figure below shows typical PTC sensor
resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature.
Ohm
Temperature
FbEq
Resistance
Normal
0 1.5 kohm
Excessive
> 4 kohm
4000
1330
550
100
T
35.02
35.03
35.04
Defines the alarm limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The alarm
indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
Defines the fault trip limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The fault
indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 5000
-10 5000
MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL Activates the motor 2 temperature measurement function and selects the
sensor type. Two motors can be protected only by using an optional analogue
extension module. Parameter 98.12 needs to be activated.
Note: If 98.12 is activated, the analogue I/O extension is also used for motor 1
temperature measurement (the standard I/O terminals are not in use).
Note: If an optional analogue I/O extension module RAIO is used for the
temperature measurement and 35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL and/or 35.04
MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL are set to 1xPT100, analogue extension module input
signal range must be set to 0...2 V (instead of 0...10 V) with DIP switches.
35.05
NOT IN USE
See 35.01.
1xPT100
See 35.01.
2XPT100
See 35.01.
3XPT100
See 35.01.
1...3 PTC
See 35.01.
Defines the alarm limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function. The
alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
See 35.02.
-10 5000
152
Index
Name/Selection
Description
35.06
Defines the fault trip limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function.
The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
See 35.03.
MOT MOD
COMPENSAT
35.07
FbEq
-10 5000
NO
YES
40 PID CONTROL
40.01
PID GAIN
0.1 100.0
Gain value. The table below lists a few examples of the gain settings and the
resulting speed changes when
10 10000
Speed Change:
Speed Change:
10% Error
0.5
40.02
50% Error
75 rpm
375 rpm
1.0
150 rpm
750 rpm
3.0
450 rpm
GI
GI
Ti
40.03
time
0.02 320.00 s
Integration time
Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. The derivative
component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive
error values (EK-1 and EK) according to the following formula:
2 32000
Derivation time.
0 1000
153
Index
Name/Selection
Description
40.04
Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to smooth the derivative
component of the process PID controller.
0.04 10.00 s
FbEq
4 1000
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 - e-t/T)
100
63
Filtered Signal
T
40.05
Inverts the error at the process PID controller input (error = process reference process actual value).
NO
No inversion
YES
Inversion.
65535
40.07
40.08
Selects the process actual value for the process PID controller: The sources
for the variable ACT1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 40.07 and
40.08.
ACT1
ACT1
ACT1-ACT2
1
2
ACT1+ACT2
ACT1*ACT2
ACT1/ACT2
MIN(A1,A2)
MAX(A1,A2)
sqrt(A1-A2)
sqA1+sqA2
Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of ACT2
ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT1. See parameter 40.06.
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI5
AI6
PARAM 40.25
ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT2. See parameter 40.06.
AI1
AI2
AI3
154
Index
40.09
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
AI5
AI6
ACT1 MINIMUM
Defines the minimum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is
selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.07. The minimum and
maximum (40.10) settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal
received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used
by the process PID controller.
-1000 1000%
Minimum value in percent of the set analogue input range. The equation below -10000
10000
instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is used as a
variable ACT1.
ACT1 MINIMUM =
40.10
40.12
40.13
13.02 - 13.01
100%
AI1min
13.01
13.02
ACT1 MAXIMUM
Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is
selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.07. The minimum (40.09)
and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal received
from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the
process PID controller.
-1000 1000%
-10000
Maximum value in percent of the set analogue input signal range. The
equation below instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is 10000
used as a variable ACT1.
ACT1 MAXIMUM =
40.11
AI1min - 13.01
AI1max - 13.01
13.02 - 13.01
100%
AI1max
13.01
13.02
ACT2 MINIMUM
-1000 1000%
ACT2 MAXIMUM
-1000 1000%
PID INTEGRATION
-10000
10000
-10000
10000
OFF
Inactive
ON
Active
155
Index
Name/Selection
Description
40.14
TRIM MODE
Activates the trim function and selects between the direct and proportional
trimming. Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive
reference. See section Reference trimming on page 47.
FbEq
Example: A speed-controlled conveyor line where the line tension also needs
to be considered: The speed reference is slightly adjusted (trimmed)
depending on the value of the measured line tension.
Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
40.15
OFF
PROPORTIONAL
The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to the external
%-reference (REF2). See parameter 11.06.
DIRECT
The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum 3
limit used in the reference control loop (maximum speed, frequency or torque).
Selects the signal source for the trim reference. Not visible when parameter
99.02 = PID CTRL.
Example: AI5 as a trim reference
sclAI5
Trim reference
minAI5
= parameter 13.16
maxAI5
= parameter 13.17
sclAI5
= parameter 13.18
-sclAI5
-maxAI5
-minAI5 minAI5
maxAI5
40.16
40.17
40.18
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI5
AI6
PAR 40.16
PAR 40.28
TRIM REFERENCE
Defines the trim reference value when parameter 40.15 has the value PAR
40.16 selected. Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
-100.0 100.0%
Trim reference
TRIM RANGE
ADJUST
Defines the multiplier for the PID controller output used as the trimming factor.
Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
-100.0 100.0%
Multiplying factor
TRIM SELECTION
Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the speed or torque
reference.
SPEED TRIM
- 10000
10000
- 10000
10000
156
Index
40.19
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
TORQUE TRIM
DIRECT SPD T
3
Speed reference trimming. Trim reference is added to the speed reference
after ramp calculations. Trimming is not effective during ramp stop, emergency
stop or at speed defined by parameter 30.18 in a fieldbus communication
break.
Defines the time constant for the filter through which the actual signals are
connected to the process PID controller.
0.04 10.00 s
4 1000
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 -
100
63
40.20
SLEEP SELECTION
Filtered Signal
e-t/T)
Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the activation input.
Visible only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
See section Sleep function for the process PID control on page 69.
OFF
Inactive
INTERNAL
DI1
40.21
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
10
DI9
11
DI10
12
DI11
13
DI12
14
SLEEP LEVEL
Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the motor speed is below a set
level (40.21) longer than the sleep delay (40.22), the drive shifts to the sleeping
mode: the motor is stopped and the control panel shows the warning message
SLEEP MODE.
Visible only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
40.22
SLEEP DELAY
Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See parameter 40.21. When the
motor speed falls below the sleep level, the counter starts. When the motor
speed exceeds the sleep level, the counter resets.
Visible only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
0 7200
157
Index
40.23
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
0.0 3600.0 s
0 36000
WAKE UP LEVEL
Defines the wake-up limit for the sleep function. The drive wakes up if the
process actual value is below a set level (40.23) longer than the wake-up delay
(40.24).
0.0 100.0%
WAKE UP DELAY
Defines the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See parameter 40.23. When
the process actual value falls below the wake-up level, the wake-up counter
starts. When the process actual value exceeds the wake-up level, the counter
resets.
0.0 3600.0 s
Wake-up delay
ACTUAL1 PTR
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 40.25 of parameter 40.07.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
PID MINIMUM
Defines the minimum limit for the PID controller output. Using the minimum and
maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed range.
0 10000
40.26
0 36000
100 = 1%
Example: The process PID control is restricted to the forward rotation direction
of the motor by setting the PID minimum limit to 0% and the maximum to
100%.
40.27
40.28
-100 100%
PID MAXIMUM
Defines the maximum limit for the PID controller output. Using the minimum
and maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed
range. See parameter 40.26.
-100 100%
Defines the trim reference value when parameter 40.15 has been set to value
PAR 40.28.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
100 = 1%
100 = 1%
100 = 1%
- Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is
effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs.
- Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value
C to enable the constant setting.
42 BRAKE CONTROL
42.01
42.02
BRAKE CTRL
OFF
Inactive
ON
Active
BRAKE
ACKNOWLEDGE
Activates the external brake on/off supervision and selects the source for the
signal. The use of the external on/off supervision signal is optional.
OFF
Inactive
DI5
Active. Digital input DI5 is the signal source. DI5 = 1: The brake is open.
DI5 = 0: the brake is closed.
DI6
DI11
DI12
158
Index
Name/Selection
42.03
BRAKE OPEN DELAY Defines the brake open delay (= the delay between the internal open brake
command and the release of the motor speed control). The delay counter
starts when the drive has magnetised the motor and risen the motor torque to
the level required at the brake release (parameters 42.07 and 42.08).
Simultaneously with the counter start, the brake function energises the relay
output controlling the brake and the brake starts opening.
42.04
42.05
42.06
42.07
42.08
Description
0.0 5.0 s
Delay time. Set the delay the same as the mechanical opening delay of the
brake specified the brake manufacturer.
BRAKE CLOSE
DELAY
Defines the brake close delay. The delay counter starts when the motor actual
speed has fallen below the set level (parameter 42.05) after the drive has
received the stop command. Simultaneously with the counter start, the brake
control function de-energises the relay output controlling the brake and the
brake starts closing. During the delay, the brake function keeps the motor live
preventing the motor speed from falling below zero.
0.0 60.0 s
Delay time. Set the delay time to the same value as the mechanical make-up
time of the brake (= operating delay when closing) specified by the brake
manufacturer.
0 1000 rpm
FbEq
0 500
0 6000
0 100000
BRAKE FAULT FUNC Defines how the drive reacts in case the status of the optional external brake
acknowledgement signal does not meet the status presumed by the brake
control function.
FAULT
The drive trips on a fault: fault indication and drive stops the motor.
WARNING
Selects the source for the motor starting torque reference applied at the brake
release. The value is read in percent of the motor nominal torque.
NO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI5
AI6
PAR 42.08
MEMORY
Defines the motor starting torque at brake release if parameter 42.07 has value
PAR 40.28.
-300 300%
-30000
30000
159
Index
Name/Selection
Description
42.09
EXTEND RUN T
Defines an extended run time for the brake control function at stop. During the
delay, the motor is kept magnetised and ready for an immediate restart.
FbEq
0.0 60.0 s
0.0 s = Normal stop routine of the brake control function: The motor
magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay has passed.
100 = 1 s
0.1 60.0 s = Extended stop routine of the brake control function: The motor
magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay and the extended run
time have passed. During the extended run time, a zero torque reference is
applied, and the motor is ready for a immediate restart.
Start/Stop
Motor magnetised
Actual speed
1 = brake close speed
2 = brake close delay
3 = extended run time
1
2
42.10
LOW REF BRK HOLD Activates a brake hold function and defines the hold delay for it. The function
stabilises the operation of the brake control application when the motor
operates near zero speed and there is no measured speed feedback available
(pulse encoder).
0.0 60.0 s
100 = 1 s
0.0 s = inactive.
0.1 s 60.0 s = active. When the absolute value of the motor speed reference
falls below the brake close speed:
- The brake hold delay counter starts.
- The brake is closed according to normal stop routine of the brake control
function.
During the delay, the function keeps the brake closed despite of the speed
reference value and the value of start command. When the set delay has
passed, the normal operation resumes.
50 ENCODER MODULE
50.01
50.02
PULSE NR
0 29999 ppr
0 29999
SPEED MEAS MODE Defines how the encoder pulses are calculated.
A -- B DIR
A ---
Channel A: positive and negative edges calculated for speed. Channel B: not
used.
A --- B DIR
Channel A: positive and negative edges are calculated for speed. Channel B:
direction.
A --- B ---
160
Index
Name/Selection
Description
50.03
ENCODER FAULT
FbEq
-The difference between estimated and measured speed is greater than 20%
of the motor nominal speed.
- No pulses are received from the encoder within the defined time (see
parameter 50.04) and the motor torque is at the allowed maximum value.
50.04
50.05
WARNING
FAULT
The drive trips on a fault, gives a fault indication and stops the motor.
65535
ENCODER DELAY
Defines the time delay for the encoder supervision function (See parameter
50.03).
0 50000 ms
Time delay
0 50000
ENCODER DDCS CH Defines the fibre optic channel of the control board from which the drive
program reads the signals coming from the pulse encoder interface module.
The setting is valid only if the module is connected to the drive via the DDCS
link (i.e. not to the option slot of the drive).
CH 1
50.06
50.07
Signals via channel 1 (CH1). The pulse encoder interface module must be
1
connected to CH1 instead of CH2 in applications where CH2 is reserved by a
Master station (e.g. a Master/Follower application). See also parameter 70.03.
CH 2
SPEED FB SEL
INTERNAL
65535
ENCODER
NO
No action
WARNING
FAULT
51 COMM MODULE
DATA
The parameters are visible and need to be adjusted, only when a fieldbus
adapter module (optional) is installed and activated by parameter 98.02. For
details on the parameters, refer to the manual of the fieldbus module and
chapter Fieldbus control.
These parameter settings will remain the same even though the macro is
changed.
52 STANDARD
MODBUS
The settings for the Standard Modbus Link. See chapter Fieldbus control.
52.01
STATION NUMBER
Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same address are not
allowed on-line.
1 247
Address
52.02
BAUDRATE
600
600 bit/s
1200
1200 bit/s
2400
2400 bit/s
4800
4800 bit/s
1=1
161
Index
52.03
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
9600
9600 bit/s
5
6
19200
19200 bit/s
PARITY
Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must be used in all
on-line stations.
NONE1STOPBIT
NONE2STOPBIT
ODD
EVEN
60 MASTER/
FOLLOWER
60.01
MASTER LINK MODE Defines the role of the drive on the Master/Follower link.
Note: Two Master stations are not allowed on-line. If a Follower drive is
changed to be a Master drive (or vice versa) by this parameter, the RMIO
board must be powered up again for the M/F link to work properly.
60.02
NOT IN USE
MASTER
Master drive
FOLLOWER
Follower drive
STANDBY
Follower drive which reads the control signals through a fieldbus interface, not 4
from the Master/Follower link as usual.
TORQUE SELECTOR Selects the reference used in motor torque control. Typically, the value needs
to be changed only in the Follower station(s).
The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 = T CTRL.
External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable torque selector.
ZERO
SPEED
The follower speed controller output is used as a reference for motor torque
control. The drive is speed-controlled. SPEED can be used both in the
Follower and in the Master if
- the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are connected flexibly. (A slight
speed difference between the Master and the Follower is possible/allowed.)
- drooping is used (see parameter 60.06).
TORQUE
Note: If TORQUE is selected, the drive does not restrict the speed variation as
long as the speed is within the limits defined by parameters 20.01 and 20.02.
More definite speed supervision is often needed. In those cases, the selection
ADD should be used instead of TORQUE.
MINIMUM
The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed
controller output, and the smaller of them is used as the reference for the
motor torque control. MINIMUM is selected in special cases only.
MAXIMUM
5
The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed
controller output and the greater of them is used as the reference for the motor
torque control. MAXIMUM is selected in special cases only.
162
Index
60.03
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
ADD
The torque selector adds the speed controller output to the direct torque
reference. The drive is torque-controlled in the normal operating range. The
selection ADD, together with the window control, forms a speed supervision
function for a torque-controlled Follower drive. See parameter 60.03.
WINDOW SEL ON
Activates the Window control function. The Window control, together with
selection ADD at parameter 60.02, forms a speed supervision function for a
torque-controlled drive. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is
T CTRL. External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable window
control.
NO
Inactive
YES
65535
Window control is active. Selection YES is used only when parameter 60.02
has value ADD. Window control supervises the speed error value (Speed
Reference - Actual Speed). In the normal operating range, window control
keeps the speed controller input at zero. The speed controller is evoked only if:
60.05
WINDOW WIDTH
POS
Defines the supervision window width above the speed reference. See
parameter 60.03. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is T
CTRL.
0 1500 rpm
WINDOW WIDTH
NEG
Defines the supervision window width below the speed reference. See
parameter 60.03. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is T
CTRL.
0 1500 rpm
0 20000
0 20000
163
Index
Name/Selection
Description
60.06
DROOP RATE
Defines the droop rate. The parameter value needs to be changed only if both
the Master and the Follower are speed-controlled:
FbEq
Speed Decrease =
Speed Controller Output Drooping Max. Speed
Example: Speed Controller output is 50%, DROOP RATE is
1%, maximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm.
Speed decrease = 0.50 0.01 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm
100%
No Drooping
} Par. 60.06 DROOP RATE
Drooping
100%
60.07
60.08
0 100%
MASTER SIGNAL 2
Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 1
(speed reference).
0 1000
0000 9999
Parameter index
MASTER SIGNAL 3
Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 2
(torque reference).
0000 9999
Parameter index
0000
9999
0000
9999
70 DDCS CONTROL
70.01
CHANNEL 0 ADDR
Defines the node address for channel 0. No two nodes on-line may have the
same address. The setting needs to be changed when a master station is
connected to channel 0 and it does not automatically change the address of
the slave. Examples of such masters are an ABB Advant Controller or another
drive.
1 125
Address.
70.02
CHANNEL 3 ADDR
Node address for channel 3. No two nodes on-line may have the same
address. Typically the setting needs to be changed when the drive is
connected in a ring which consists of several drives and a PC with the
DriveWindow program running.
1 254
Address.
1 125
1 254
164
Index
Name/Selection
Description
70.03
8 Mbit/s
4 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
1 Mbit/s
CH0 DDCS HW
CONN
70.04
70.05
RING
STAR
65535
CH2 HW
CONNECTION
1=1
0 = RING
1 = STAR
72.01
Activates the user load curve and selects how the drive reacts when the user
load curve has been exceeded.
72.02
72.03
72.04
72.05
72.06
72.07
FbEq
OVERLOAD FUNC
NO
WARNING
The drive generates a warning USER L CURVE. Drive output current is not
limited.
FAULT
LIMIT
LIMIT / WARN
Drive output current is limited to Iuser curve and the drive generates a warning
USER L CURVE.
LOAD CURRENT 1
Defines the first current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par.
72.10 LOAD FREQ 1.
0...800%
LOAD CURRENT 2
Defines the second current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by
par. 72.11 LOAD FREQ 2.
0...800%
LOAD CURRENT 3
Defines the third current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par.
72.12 LOAD FREQ 3.
0...800%
LOAD CURRENT 4
Defines the fourth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by
par. 72.13 LOAD FREQ 4.
0...800%
LOAD CURRENT 5
Defines the fifth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by par.
72.14 LOAD FREQ 5.
0...800%
LOAD CURRENT 6
Defines the sixth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by
par. 72.15 LOAD FREQ 6.
0...800%
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
165
Index
Name/Selection
Description
72.08
LOAD CURRENT 7
Defines the seventh current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by
par. 72.16 LOAD FREQ 7.
FbEq
0...800%
72.09
LOAD CURRENT 8
Defines the eighth current point of the load curve at the frequency defined by
par. 72.17 LOAD FREQ 8.
1=1
0...800%
72.10
LOAD FREQ 1
72.11
LOAD FREQ 2
par. 72.10...
par. 72.12 %
72.12
72.13
72.14
72.15
72.16
72.17
72.18
1=1
1=1
1=1
LOAD FREQ 3
par. 72.11...
par. 72.13 %
1=1
LOAD FREQ 4
par. 72.12...
par. 72.14 %
1=1
LOAD FREQ 5
par. 72.13...
par. 72.15 %
LOAD FREQ 6
par. 72.14...
par. 72.16 %
1=1
1=1
LOAD FREQ 7
par. 72.15...
par. 72.17 %
1=1
LOAD FREQ 8
par. 72.16...600%
LOAD CURRENT
LIMIT
Defines the overload current. Value is used by the overload integrator (I2dt).
1=1
If the continuous motor load capacity (i.e. the defined user load curve) is not
100% at the nominal frequency, calculate the overload current using the
following equation:
72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT =
2
2
2
I overload I user curve + 100
where Ioverload is the motor overload and Iuser curve is the current defined by the
user load curve at the nominal frequency. User load curve is defined by
parameters 72.02...72.17.
Example: Motor overload capacity is 150% of the nominal current for
10 s / 10 min and the continuous load capacity is 80% at the nominal
frequency:
72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT =
10 = 1%
166
Index
Name/Selection
Description
72.19
LOAD THERMAL
TIME
Defines the overload time. Value is used by the overload integrator (I2dt). See 10 = 1 s
the example given for par. 72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT.
0.0...9999.9 s
Time. If the value is set to zero, the drive output current is limited to the user
load curve defined by parameters 72.02...72.17.
LOAD COOLING
TIME
Defines the cooling time. The output of the overload integrator is set to zero if
the current stays continuously below the user load curve for the defined cooling
time. See the example given for par. 72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT.
0...9999 s
Time
72.20
Control of the Adaptive Program execution. For more information, see the
Adaptive Program Application Guide [3AFE64527274 (English)].
83.01
83.02
FbEq
1=1s
STOP
RUN
EDIT
EDIT COMMAND
Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by parameter
83.03. The program must be in editing mode (see parameter 83.01).
NO
PUSH
Shifts the block in location defined by parameter 83.03 and the following blocks 2
one location up. A new block can be placed in the emptied location by
programming the Block Parameter Set as usual.
Example: A new block needs to be placed in between the current block
number four (parameters 84.20 84.25) and five (parameters 84.25
84.29).
In order to do this:
- Shift the program to the editing mode by parameter 83.01.
- Select location number five as the desired location for the new block by
parameter 83.03.
- Shift the block in location number 5 and the following blocks one location
forward by parameter 83.02. (selection PUSH)
- Program the emptied location number 5 by parameters 84.25 to 84.29 as
usual.
DELETE
Deletes the block in location defined by parameter 83.03 and shifts the
following blocks one step down.
PROTECT
167
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
UNPROTECT
83.04
83.05
EDIT BLOCK
Defines the block location number for the command selected by parameter
83.02.
1 15
TIMELEVEL SEL
Selects the execution cycle time for the Adaptive Program. The setting is valid
for all blocks.
12 ms
12 milliseconds
100 ms
100 milliseconds
1000 ms
1000 milliseconds
PASSCODE
Sets the passcode for the Adaptive Program protection. The passcode is
needed at activation and inactivation of the protection. See parameter 83.02.
84 ADAPTIVE
PROGRAM
1=1
84.01
STATUS
Shows the value of the Adaptive Program status word. The table below shows
the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
Display
1
2
4
8
10
20
40
100
Meaning
Stopped
Running
Faulted
Editing
Checking
Pushing
Popping
Initialising
84.02
FAULTED PAR
84.05
BLOCK1
Selects the function block for Block Parameter Set 1. See the Adaptive
Program Application Guide [3AFE64527274 (English)].
ABS
11
ADD
10
AND
BITWISE
26
COMPARE
16
COUNT
21
DPOT
23
EVENT
20
168
Index
Name/Selection
Description
13
MASK-SET
24
MAX
17
MIN
18
MULDIV
12
NO
OR
PI
14
PI-BAL
15
PI BIPOLAR
25
RAMP
22
SR
SWITCH-B
SWITCH-I
19
TOFF
TON
TRIGG
XOR
84.06
FbEq
FILTER
INPUT1
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
- Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is
effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs.
- Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value
C to enable the constant setting.
Example: The state of digital input DI2 is connected to Input 1 as follows:
- Set the source selection parameter (84.06) to +.01.17.01. (The application
program stores the state of digital input DI2 to bit 1 of actual signal 01.17.)
- If you need an inverted value, switch the sign of the pointer value
(-01.17.01.).
84.07
84.08
INPUT2
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
INPUT3
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
84.09
OUTPUT
84.79
OUTPUT
85 USER CONSTANTS
85.01
CONSTANT1
-8388608 to 8388607
Integer value
1=1
169
Index
Name/Selection
Description
85.02
CONSTANT2
-8388608 to 8388607
Integer value
CONSTANT3
-8388608 to 8388607
Integer value
CONSTANT4
-8388608 to 8388607
Integer value
CONSTANT5
-8388608 to 8388607
Integer value
CONSTANT6
-8388608 to 8388607
Integer value
CONSTANT7
-8388608 to 8388607
Integer value
CONSTANT8
85.03
85.04
85.05
85.06
85.07
85.08
-8388608 to 8388607
Integer value
85.09
CONSTANT9
-8388608 to 8388607
Integer value
85.10
CONSTANT10
85.11
85.12
85.13
85.14
85.15
FbEq
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
-8388608 to 8388607
Integer value
STRING1
MESSAGE1
Message
STRING2
MESSAGE2
Message
STRING3
MESSAGE3
Message
STRING4
MESSAGE4
Message
STRING5
MESSAGE5
Message
1=1
-
- Addresses into which the received fieldbus data sets are written.
- Numbers of the main and auxiliary data sets.
The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02. For more information, see chapter Fieldbus control.
90.01
90.02
AUX DS REF3
Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF3 is written.
0 8999
Parameter index
AUX DS REF4
Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF4 is written.
0 8999
Parameter index
90.03
AUX DS REF5
Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF5 is written.
0 8999
Parameter index
90.04
MAIN DS SOURCE
Defines the data set from which the drive reads the Control Word, Reference
REF1 and Reference REF2.
90.05
1 255
AUX DS SOURCE
Defines the data set from which the drive reads References REF3, REF4 and
REF5.
170
Index
Name/Selection
Description
1 255
92 D SET TR ADDR
FbEq
Main and Auxiliary Data Sets which the drive sends to the fieldbus master
station.
The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02. For more information, see chapter Fieldbus control.
92.01
92.02
92.03
92.04
92.05
92.06
92.07
MAIN DS STATUS
WORD
Stores the address from which the Main Status Word is read from. Fixed value,
not visible.
302 (fixed)
Parameter index
MAIN DS ACT1
Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 1 is read to the Main Data
Set.
0 9999
Parameter index
MAIN DS ACT2
Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 2 is read to the Main Data
Set.
0 9999
Parameter index
AUX DS ACT3
Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 3 is read to the Auxiliary Data
Set.
0 9999
Parameter index
AUX DS ACT4
Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 4 is read to the Auxiliary Data
Set.
0 9999
Parameter index
AUX DS ACT5
Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 5 is read to the Auxiliary Data
Set.
0 9999
Parameter index
Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 10 is read from.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
92.08
Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 13 is read from.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
92.09
Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 14 is read from.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
CONST 50 Hz
171
Index
95.02
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
RUN/STOP
CONTROLLED
The speed of the fan is determined from IGBT temperature vs. fan speed
curve.
FUSE SWITCH CTRL Activates the inverter DC switch (switch fuse) monitoring function. The
monitoring must be active when the Switch Fuse Control Board (ASFC) is in
use and connected to the inverter AINT board, i.e. in all frame R8i inverters
equipped with the DC switch. The function must be inactive in units that do not
use the ASFC board with the DC switch, i.e. for frame R2iR7i inverters and
all single drive units where no DC switch exists. The default setting (ON or
OFF) for each unit is set accordingly at the factory as default.
ACS800 IGBT pulses are always blocked when the program detects that the
DC switch is opened or inverter charging is ongoing (at power switch on). The
application program generates alarm INV DISABLED if the DC switch is
opened when the inverter is stopped. The inverter trips to fault INV DISABLED
if the DC switch is opened when the inverter is running.
95.03
95.04
95.05
OFF
Inactive
ON
Active
1...12
EX/SIN REQUEST
NO
Inactive
EX
Ex-motor application. Used with motors which comply with the ATEX directive. 2
SIN
Sine filter application. See the Sine Filters Users Manual for ACS800 Drives
[3AFE68389178 (English)].
EX&SIN
EX-motor and sine filter applications. See the Sine Filters Users Manual for
ACS800 Drives [3AFE68389178 (English)].
NO
Inactive
YES
Active. Minimum switching frequency limit is set to 2 kHz. Used with motors
with an ATEX certification based on 2 kHz minimum switching frequency.
172
Index
Name/Selection
Description
95.06
LCU Q PW REF
Defines the reference value for the line-side converter reactive power
generation. Line-side converter can generate reactive power to the supply
network. This reference is written into line-side converter unit parameter 24.02
Q POWER REF2. For more information, see IGBT Supply Control Program 7.x
Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)].
FbEq
30
P
Positive reference 30 denotes capacitive load.
Negative reference 30 denotes inductive load.
P = signal 01.09 POWER value
Parameter 24.03 values are converter to degrees by the line-side converter
application program: -3000...30000 = -30...30. Value -10000/10000 equals to
-30/30, since the range is limited to -3000/3000.
95.07
95.08
95.09
95.10
-10000...10000
Reference value.
LCU DC REF
0...1100 V
Voltage
Selects the line-side converter address from which the actual signal 09.12 LCU
ACT SIGNAL1 is read from.
09999
Selects the line-side converter address from which the actual signal 09.13 LCU
ACT SIGNAL2 is read from.
09999
Line-side converter parameter index. Default value 110 = line side converter
parameter 01.10 DC VOLTAGE. For more information, see IGBT Supply
Control Program 7.x Firmware manual [3AFE68315735 (English)].
See par.
description.
1=1V
09999
09999
Temperature
10 = 1C
173
Index
Name/Selection
96 EXTERNAL AO
Description
FbEq
Output signal selection and processing for the analogue extension module
(optional).
The parameters are visible only when the module is installed and activated by
parameter 98.06.
96.01
96.02
EXT AO1
Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module.
NOT USED
P SPEED
SPEED
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
TORQUE
POWER
DC BUS VOLT
OUTPUT VOLT
APPL OUTPUT
10
REFERENCE
11
CONTROL DEV
12
ACTUAL 1
13
ACTUAL 2
14
COM.REF4
15
PARAM 96.11
16
Activates the inversion of analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension
module.
NO
Inactive
YES
Active. The analogue signal is at a minimum level when the drive signal
indicated is at its maximum and vice versa.
65535
174
Index
Name/Selection
Description
96.03
Defines the minimum value for the analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module.
FbEq
Note: Actually, the setting 10 mA or 12 mA does not set the AO1 minimum but
fixes 10/12 mA to actual signal value zero.
Example: Motor speed is read through the analogue output.
- The motor nominal speed is 1000 rpm (parameter 99.08).
- 96.02 is NO.
- 96.05 is 100%.
The analogue output value as a function of the speed is shown below.
Analogue output
mA
20
Analogue output
signal minimum
12
10
4
-1000
96.04
96.05
96.06
-500
0 mA
4 mA
10 mA
12 mA
500
1000
Speed/rpm
0 mA
0 mA
4 mA
4 mA
10 mA
10 mA
12 mA
12 mA
Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module. See parameter 15.04.
0.00 10.00 s
Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module. See parameter 15.05.
10 1000%
Scaling factor
EXT AO2
Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
extension module.
NOT USED
P SPEED
SPEED
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
TORQUE
POWER
DC BUS VOLT
OUTPUT VOLT
APPL OUTPUT
10
REFERENCE
11
0 1000
100
10000
175
Index
96.07
96.08
96.09
96.10
96.11
96.12
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
CONTROL DEV
12
ACTUAL 1
13
ACTUAL 2
14
COM.REF5
15
PARAM 96.12
16
Activates the inversion of analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension
module. The analogue signal is at its minimum level when the drive signal
indicated is at its maximum and vice versa.
NO
Inactive
YES
Active
65535
Defines the minimum value for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
extension module. See parameter 96.03.
0 mA
0 mA
4 mA
4 mA
10 mA
10 mA
12 mA
12 mA
Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
extension module. See parameter 15.04.
0.00 10.00 s
Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
extension module. See parameter 15.05.
10 1000%
Scaling factor
100
10000
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96.11 of parameter 96.01.
1000 =
1 mA
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96.12 of parameter 96.06.
1000 =
1 mA
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.32768 C.32767
98 OPTION MODULES
0 1000
98.01
ENCODER MODULE
Activates the communication to the optional pulse encoder module. See also
parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE.
NTAC
Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see the
NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-up Guide
[3AFY58919730 (English)].
NO
Inactive
RTAC-SLOT1
176
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
RTAC-SLOT2
RTAC-DDCS
RRIA-SLOT1
RRIA-SLOT2
RRIA-DDCS
RTAC03-SLOT1
RTAC03-SLOT2
RTAC03-DDCS
98.02
98.03
COMM. MODULE
LINK
Activates the external serial communication and selects the interface. See
chapter Fieldbus control.
NO
No communication
FIELDBUS
ADVANT
The drive communicates with an ABB Advant OCS system via CH0 on the
RDCO board (optional). See also parameter group 70 DDCS CONTROL.
STD MODBUS
The drive communicates with a Modbus controller via the Modbus Adapter
Module (RMBA) in option slot 1 of the drive. See also parameter 52
STANDARD MODBUS.
CUSTOMISED
The drive communicates via a customer specified link. The control sources are 5
defined by parameters 90.04 and 90.05.
DI/O EXT MODULE 1 Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 1 (optional)
and defines the type and connection interface of the module.
Module inputs: See parameter 98.09 for the use of the inputs in the drive
application program.
Module outputs: See parameters 14.10 and 14.11 for selecting the drive states
that are indicated through the relay outputs.
NDIO
177
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
NO
Inactive
RDIO-SLOT1
RDIO-SLOT2
RDIO-DDCS
98.04
DI/O EXT MODULE 2 Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 2 (optional)
and defines the type and connection interface of the module.
Module inputs: See parameter 98.10 for the use of the inputs in the drive
application program.
Module outputs: See parameters 14.12 and 14.13 for selecting the drive states
that are indicated through the relay outputs.
NDIO
Note: Module node number must be set to 3. For directions, see the NTAC-0x/
NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58919730
(English)].
NO
Inactive
RDIO-SLOT1
RDIO-SLOT2
RDIO-DDCS
98.05
DI/O EXT MODULE 3 Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 3 (optional)
and defines the type and connection interface of the module.
Module inputs: See parameter 98.11 for the use of the inputs in the drive
application program.
Module outputs: See parameters 14.14 and 14.15 for selecting the drive states
that are indicated through the relay outputs.
NDIO
Note: Module node number must be set to 4. For directions, see the NTAC-0x/
NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58919730
(English)].
NO
Inactive
RDIO-SLOT1
RDIO-SLOT2
178
Index
Name/Selection
Description
RDIO-DDCS
FbEq
Note: Module node number must be set to 4. For directions, see the RDIO
Module Users Manual [3AFE64485733 (English)].
98.06
NAIO
Note: Module node number must be set to 5. For directions, see the NTAC-0x/
NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58919730
(English)].
NO
Communication inactive
RAIO-SLOT1
RAIO-SLOT2
RAIO-DDCS
98.07
98.09
98.10
COMM PROFILE
Defines the profile on which the communication with the fieldbus or another
drive is based. Visible only when fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02.
ABB DRIVES
GENERIC
Generic drive profile. Typically used with the fieldbus modules that have the
type designation of form Rxxx (installed in the option slot of the drive).
CSA 2.8/3.0
Defines the naming of the inputs of digital I/O extension module 1 in the drive
application program. See parameter 98.03.
DI7,8
DI1 and DI2 of the module extend the number of input channels. The module
inputs are named DI7 and DI8.
REPL DI1,2
DI1 and DI2 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1 and DI2.
The inputs are named DI1 and DI2.
DI7,8,9
DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module extend the number of input channels. The
module inputs are named DI7, DI8 and DI9.
REPL DI1,2,3
DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1, DI2
and DI3. The inputs are named DI1, DI2 and DI3.
Defines the naming of the inputs of digital I/O extension module 2 in the drive
application program. See parameter 98.04.
179
Index
98.11
98.12
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
DI9,10
DI1 and DI2 of the module extend the number of input channels. The module
inputs are named DI9 and DI10.
REPL DI3,4
DI1 and DI2 of the module replace the standard input channels DI3 and DI4.
The inputs are named DI3 and DI4.
DI10,11,12
DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module extend the number of input channels. The
module inputs are named DI10, DI11 and DI12.
REPL DI4,5,6
DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1, DI2
and DI3. The inputs are named DI4, DI5 and DI6.
Defines the naming of the inputs of digital I/O extension module 3 in the drive
application program. See parameter 98.05.
DI11,12
DI1 and DI2 of the module extend the number of input channels. The module
inputs are named DI11 and DI12.
REPL DI5,6
DI1 and DI2 of the module replace the standard input channels DI5 and DI6.
The inputs are named DI5 and DI6.
AI1
AI2
Before setting the drive parameters, ensure the module hardware settings are
appropriate for the motor temperature measurement:
1. The module node number is 9.
2. The input signal type selections are the following:
- for one Pt 100 sensor measurement, set the range to 0 2 V.
- for two to three Pt 100 sensors or one to three PTC sensors, set the range to
0 10 V.
3. The operation mode selection is unipolar.
180
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
NAIO
Inactive
RAIO-SLOT1
Note: Make the module hardware settings as described above. The node
number is not required. For directions, see the RAIO Module Users Manual
[3AFE64484567 (English)].
RAIO-SLOT2
RAIO-DDCS
98.13
Defines the signal type for input 1 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI5 in
the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to
the module.
UNIPOLAR AI5
Unipolar
BIPOLAR AI5
Bipolar
Defines the signal type for input 2 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI6 in
the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to
the module.
UNIPOLAR AI6
Unipolar
BIPOLAR AI6
Bipolar
Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module and reserves
the module for the use of the sine-filter temperature measurement.
98.14
98.16
Module type: NDIO module. Connection interface: Fibre optic DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 8. For directions see the NTAC-0x/
NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Module Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58919730
(English)].
NO
Supervision disabled.
RDIO-SLOT1
RDIO-SLOT2
181
Index
Name/Selection
Description
RDIO-DDCS
Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O module adapter (AIMA) 5
that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic DDCS link.
FbEq
Note: Module node number must be set to 8. For directions, see the RDIO
Module User's Manual [3AFE64485733 (English)].
99 START-UP DATA
99.01
99.02
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
British English
ENGLISH AM
DEUTSCH
German
ITALIANO
Italian
ESPANOL
Spanish
PORTUGUES
Portuguese
NEDERLANDS
Dutch
FRANCAIS
French
DANSK
Danish
SUOMI
Finnish
SVENSKA
Swedish
10
CESKY
Czech
11
POLSKI/LOC1
Polish
12
PO-RUS/LOC2
Russian
13
APPLICATION
MACRO
Selects the application macro. See chapter Application macros for more
information.
Note: When you change the default parameter values of a macro, the new
settings become valid immediately and stay valid even if the power of the drive
is switched off and on. However, backup of the default parameter settings
(factory settings) of each standard macro is still available. See parameter
99.03.
FACTORY
HAND/AUTO
PID control. For application in which the drive controls a process value. E.g.
pressure control by the drive running the pressure boost pump. Measured
pressure and the pressure reference are connected to the drive.
See sections Process PID control on page 68 and Sleep function for the
process PID control on page 69.
T-CTRL
SEQ CTRL
Sequential Control macro. For applications that are frequently run through a
5
pre-defined speed pattern (constant speeds and acceleration and deceleration
ramps).
USER 1 LOAD
User 1 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter 6
settings and the motor model are suitable for the application.
182
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
USER 1 SAVE
Save User 1 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor
model.
Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See
parameter 99.03.
USER 2 LOAD
User 2 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter 8
settings and the motor model are suitable for the application.
USER 2 SAVE
Save User 2 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor
model.
Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See
parameter 99.03.
99.03
APPLIC RESTORE
99.04
NO
No action
YES
Restoring
65535
SCALAR
Scalar control is suitable in special cases where the DTC cannot be applied.
The scalar control mode is recommended:
65535
MOTOR NOM
VOLTAGE
1/2 2 UN
Defines the nominal motor voltage. Must be equal to the value on the motor
rating plate.
Voltage. Allowed range is 1/2 2 UN of the drive.
Note: The stress on the motor insulations is always dependent on the drive
supply voltage. This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is
lower than the rating of the drive and the supply of the drive.
1=1V
183
Index
Name/Selection
Description
99.06
MOTOR NOM
CURRENT
Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value on the motor
rating plate.
FbEq
Note: Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor
does not exceed 90 percent of the nominal current of the inverter.
0 2 I2hd
1 = 0.1 A
99.08
8 300 Hz
800
30000
MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the value on the motor
rating plate. The motor synchronous speed or another approximate value must
not be given instead!
Note: If the value of parameter 99.08 is changed, the speed limits in parameter
group 20 LIMITS change automatically as well.
1 18000 rpm
99.09
MOTOR NOM
POWER
Defines the nominal motor power. Set exactly as on the motor rating plate.
1 18000
0 9000 kW
99.10
MOTOR ID RUN
MODE
Selects the type of the motor identification. During the identification, the drive
will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID
Run Procedure is described in chapter Start-up and control through the I/O.
0 90000
STANDARD
Standard ID Run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The ID Run
takes about one minute.
- if mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the motor cannot be decoupled from the driven equipment)
- if flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (i.e. in case of a
motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals).
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run.
During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80% of the
nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
184
Index
Name/Selection
Description
99.11
DEVICE NAME
Defines the name for the drive or application. The name is visible on the
control panel display in the Drive Selection Mode. Note: The name can be
typed only by using a drive PC tool.
FbEq
185
Fieldbus control
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over
a communication network.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system usually a fieldbus
controller via an adapter module. The drive can be set to receive all of its control
information through the external control interface, or the control can be distributed
between the external control interface and other available sources, for example
digital and analogue inputs. The following diagram shows the control interfaces and
I/O connections of the drive.
Fieldbus
controller
Fieldbus
Other
devices
ACS800
(*
(*
Fieldbus adapter
Rxxx
Controller
Modbus
RMIO board
Slot 1
(*
RMBA-01 adapter
std. Modbus link
I/O adapter
RTAC/RDIO/RAIO
Slot 1 or 2
RDCO comm.
module
Advant
controller
(e.g. AC 800M,
AC 80)
CH1
AIMA-01 I/O
(DDCS) adapter module
CH0
(DDCS)
Fieldbus adapter
Nxxx
or
Data Flow
Control Word (CW)
References
Either an Rxxx or Nxxx, and an RMBA-01 adapter can be connected to the drive simultaneously.
Fieldbus control
186
Modbus
ACS800
RMIO board
RPBA-01 adapter
PROFIBUS-DP link
Slot 1
RMBA-01 adapter
std. Modbus link
Slot 2
The control (i.e. the Main Reference data set, see section The fieldbus control
interface on page 196) is activated by setting parameter 98.02 to FIELDBUS or
STD MODBUS.
In case there is a communication problem with one fieldbus, the control can be
switched to the other fieldbus. Switching between the buses can be controlled
e.g. with adaptive programming. Parameters and signals can be read by both
fieldbuses, but simultaneous cyclical writing to the same parameter is forbidden.
Fieldbus control
187
Alternative
settings
Setting for
fieldbus control
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION
98.02
NO
FIELDBUS
ADVANT
STD MODBUS
CUSTOMISED
FIELDBUS
98.07
ABB DRIVES
GENERIC
CSA 2.8/3.0
ABB DRIVES
GENERIC or
CSA 2.8/3.0
51.02 (FIELDBUS
PARAMETER 2)
These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the module manual.
Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily visible.
51.26 (FIELDBUS
PARAMETER 26)
51.27 FBA PAR
REFRESH*
(0) DONE
(1) REFRESH
Fieldbus control
188
Parameter
Alternative
settings
Setting for
fieldbus control
Function/Information
51.29 FILE
CONFIG ID*
51.30 FILE
CONFIG REV*
51.31 FBA
STATUS*
(0) IDLE
(1) EXEC. INIT
(2) TIME OUT
(3) CONFIG
ERROR
(4) OFF-LINE
(5) ON-LINE
(6) RESET
*Parameters 51.27 to 51.33 are only visible when type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is installed.
After the module configuration parameters in group 51 have been set, the drive
control parameters (section Drive control parameters on page 193) must be checked
and adjusted where necessary.
The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when
parameter 51.27 is activated.
Fieldbus control
189
Alternative settings
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION
98.02
NO
FIELDBUS
ADVANT
STD MODBUS
CUSTOMISED
STD MODBUS
98.07
ABB DRIVES
GENERIC
CSA 2.8/3.0
ABB DRIVES
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
52.01
1 to 247
52.02
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
52.03
ODD
EVEN
NONE1STOPBIT
NONE2STOPBIT
After the communication parameters in group 52 have been set, the drive control
parameters (section Drive control parameters on page 193) must be checked and
adjusted where necessary.
Fieldbus control
190
Modbus addressing
In the Modbus controller memory, the Control Word, the Status Word, the
references, and the actual values are mapped as follows:
Data from fieldbus controller to drive
Address
Address
Contents
Contents
40001
Control Word
40004
Status Word
40002
Reference 1
40005
Actual 1
40003
Reference 2
40006
Actual 2
40007
Reference 3
40010
Actual 3
40008
Reference 4
40011
Actual 4
40009
Reference 5
40012
Actual 5
Fieldbus control
191
TB811
TB810
RDCO-02
RDCO-03
If branching unit NDBU-85/95 is used with CI810A, TB810 Optical ModuleBus Port
Interface must be used.
Fieldbus control
192
The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up
communication between the drive and Advant controller.
Parameter
Alternative settings
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION
98.02
NO
FIELDBUS
ADVANT
STD MODBUS
CUSTOMISED
ADVANT
98.07
ABB DRIVES
GENERIC
CSA 2.8/3.0
ABB DRIVES
70.01
0-254
AC 800M ModuleBus
1...125
AC 80 ModuleBus
17-125
FCI (CI810A)
17-125
70.04
RING
STAR
After the communication initialisation parameters have been set, the drive control
parameters (section Drive control parameters on page 193) must be checked and
adjusted where necessary.
In an Optical ModuleBus connection, channel 0 address (parameter 70.01) is
calculated from the value of the POSITION terminal in the appropriate database
element (for the AC 80, DRISTD) as follows:
1. Multiply the hundreds of the value of POSITION by 16.
2. Add the tens and ones of the value of POSITION to the result.
For example, if the POSITION terminal of the DRISTD database element has the
value of 110 (the tenth drive on the Optical ModuleBus ring), parameter 70.01 must
be set to 16 1 + 10 = 26.
Fieldbus control
193
Setting for
fieldbus control
Function/Information
COMM.CW
Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except 03.01 Main Control Word bit 11)
when EXT1 is selected as the active control location. See also par. 10.07.
10.02
COMM.CW
Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except 03.01 Main Control Word bit 11)
when EXT2 is selected as the active control location.
10.03
FORWARD
REVERSE or
REQUEST
10.07
0 or 1
Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par. 10.01 so that the fieldbus
Control Word (except 03.01 Main Control Word bit 11) is enabled when
EXT1 is selected as the active control location.
Note 1: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected
(see par. 98.07).
Note 2: Setting not saved into permanent memory.
10.08
0 or 1
Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par. 11.03 so that Fieldbus
reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is selected as the active control
location.
Note 1: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected
(see par. 98.07).
Note 2: Setting not saved into permanent memory.
11.02
COMM.CW
11.03
COMM.REF1
FAST COMM
COM.REF1+AI1
COM.REF1+AI5
COM.REF1*AI1 or
COM.REF1*AI5
11.06
COMM.REF2
FAST COMM
COM.REF2+AI1
COM.REF2+AI5
COM.REF2*AI1 or
COM.REF2*AI5
Fieldbus control
194
Parameter
Setting for
fieldbus control
Function/Information
COM.REF3
Enables relay output RO1 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 13.
14.02
COM.REF3
Enables relay output RO2 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 14.
14.03
COM.REF3
Enables relay output RO3 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 15.
15.01
COMM.REF4
15.06
COMM.REF5
COMM.CW
Enables the control of the Run Enable signal through fieldbus 03.01 Main
Control Word bit 3.
Note: Must be set to YES when the Generic Drive communication profile is
selected (see par. 98.07).
16.04
COMM.CW
Enables fault reset through fieldbus 03.01 Main Control Word bit 7.
Note: Reset through fieldbus Control Word (03.01 bit 7) is enabled
automatically and it is independent of parameter 16.04 setting if parameter
10.01 or 10.02 is set to COMM.CW.
16.07
DONE; SAVE
30.19
0.1 60.0 s
Defines the time between Main Reference data set loss detection and the
action selected with parameter 30.18.
30.20
ZERO
LAST VALUE
Determines the state in which relay outputs RO1 to RO3 and analogue
outputs AO1 and AO2 are left upon loss of the Auxiliary Reference data set.
30.21
0.0 60.0 s
Defines the time between Auxiliary Reference data set loss detection and
the action selected with parameter 30.18.
30.18
0 8999
Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference
REF3 is written.
Format: xxyy, where xx = parameter group (10 to 89), yy = parameter
Index. E.g. 3001 = parameter 30.01.
Fieldbus control
195
Parameter
Setting for
fieldbus control
Function/Information
90.02
0 8999
Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference
REF4 is written.
90.03
0 8999
1 (Fieldbus Control) or
81 (Standard Modbus
Control)
90.05
3 (Fieldbus Control) or
83 (Standard Modbus
Control)
302 (Fixed)
The Status Word is transmitted to as the first word of the Main Actual Signal
data set.
92.02
0 9999
92.03
0 9999
92.04
0 9999
92.05
0 9999
92.06
0 9999
92.07
-255.255.31+255.255.31
/ C.-32768 C.32767
Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 10 is read
from.
92.08
-255.255.31+255.255.31
/ C.-32768 C.32767
Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 13 is read
from.
92.09
-255.255.31+255.255.31
/ C.-32768 C.32767
Selects the address from which the 03.02 Main Status Word bit 14 is read
from.
Fieldbus control
196
*Index
Word
Word
Contents
Selector
*Index
Contents
Selector
1st word
Control Word
(Fixed)
1st word
Status Word
(Fixed)
2nd word
Reference 1
(Fixed)
2nd word
Actual 1
**Par. 92.02
3rd word
Reference 2
(Fixed)
3rd word
Actual 2
Par. 92.03
*Index
*Index
1st word
Reference 3
Par. 90.01
10
1st word
Actual 3
Par. 92.04
2nd word
Reference 4
Par. 90.02
11
2nd word
Actual 4
Par. 92.05
3rd word
Reference 5
Par. 90.03
12
3rd word
Actual 5
Par. 92.06
*The index number is required when data word allocation to process data is defined
via the fieldbus parameters at group 51. This function is dependent on the type of the
fieldbus adapter.
**With the Generic Drive communication profile active, Actual 1 is fixed to actual
signal 01.02 SPEED (in DTC motor control mode) or 01.03 FREQUENCY (in Scalar
mode).
The update time for the Main Reference and Main Actual Signal data sets is 6
milliseconds; for the Auxiliary Reference and Auxiliary Actual Signal data sets, it is
100 milliseconds.
Fieldbus control
197
Fieldbus control
198
COM.REFx+AI1
COM.REFx+AI5
Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
(100 + 0.5 [par. 13.03])%
100%
5V
10 V
AI1/AI5 Input
Voltage
5V
10 V
AI1/AI5 Input
Voltage
COM.REFx*AI1
COM.REFx*AI5
Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
100%
50%
0%
Reference handling
The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location (EXT1 and
EXT2) using the parameters in group 10. Fieldbus references are bipolar, i.e. they
can be negative or positive. The following diagrams illustrate how group 10
parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the reference
REF1/REF2.
Notes:
With the ABB Drives communication profile, 100% reference is defined by
parameters 11.05 (REF1) and 11.08 (REF2).
With the Generic Drive communication profile, 100% reference is defined by
parameter 99.08 in DTC motor control mode (REF1), or 99.07 in scalar control
mode (REF1), and by parameter 11.08 (REF2).
External reference scaling parameters 11.04 and 11.07 are also in effect.
For information on the scaling of the fieldbus reference, see section Fieldbus
reference scaling on page 208 (for ABB Drives profile) or Fieldbus reference scaling
on page 211 (for Generic Drive profile).
Fieldbus control
199
Resultant
REF1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
Max.Ref.
Fieldbus
Ref. 1/2
Max.Ref.
-100%
-163%
Fieldbus
Ref. 1/2
100%
163%
-100%
-163%
[Max.Ref.]
par. 10.03
DIRECTION =
REVERSE
100%
163%
[Max.Ref.]
Resultant
REF1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
Max.Ref.
-163%
-100%
Fieldbus
Ref. 1/2
Max.Ref.
163%
100%
Fieldbus
Ref. 1/2
-163%
-100%
[Max.Ref.]
par. 10.03
DIRECTION =
REQUEST
[Max.Ref.]
Resultant
REF1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
Max.Ref.
-163%
-100%
Fieldbus
Ref. 1/2
163%
100%
Direction Command:
FORWARD
Max.Ref.
100%
163%
[Max.Ref.]
Fieldbus
Ref. 1/2
-100%
-163%
100%
163%
[Max.Ref.]
Direction Command:
REVERSE
Actual Values
Actual Values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations
of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected with the parameters in group
92. The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depends on the
selected function; please refer to chapter Actual signals and parameters.
Fieldbus control
Fieldbus
Adapter
Slot1
Fieldbus control
n
PAR
DS
PAR
DS
DS 5
DS 4
DS 3
DS 2
DS 1
97
98 DS 33
99
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DATA
SET
TABLE
Word n
Word 1
(Control word)
Word 2
(Speed/freq ref.*)
Word 3
Words 1 n **
REF5
REF4
REF3
AUXILIARY
REFERENCE
DATA SET
REF2
REF1
CW
MAIN
REFERENCE
DATA SET
98.02
CUSTOMISED
STD
MODBUS
ADVANT
FIELDBUS
NO
98.02
CUSTOMISED
STD
MODBUS
ADVANT
FIELDBUS
NO
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Rxxx
fieldbus adapter is used
90.01
11.06
11.03
10.02
10.01
Analogue Output
AO2 (see 15.06)
90.03
Analogue Output
AO1 (see 15.01)
90.02
Relay Outputs
(see 14.0114.03)
Bits
1315
COMM.REF
AI1
COMM.REF
AI1
COMM.CW
DI1
DI1
COMM.CW
11.02
89.99
10.02
10.01
PARAMETER
TABLE
01.12
EXT REF2
01.11
EXT REF1
03.01
MAIN CW
200
92.06
92.05
92.04
92.03
92.02 **
92.01 *
ACT3
ACT4
ACT5
AUXILIARY
ACTUAL SIGNAL
DATA SET
STATUS WORD*
ACT1**
ACT2
MAIN
ACTUAL SIGNAL
DATA SET
DS 33
DS 4
DS 3
DS 2
DS 1
97
98
99
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
DS
PAR
DS
PAR
*** See the fieldbus adapter users manual for more information.
Word n
Word 1
(STATUS WORD)
Word 2
(ACT1**)
Word 3
Words 1 n ***
** Fixed to 01.02 SPEED (DTC control) or 01.03 FREQUENCY (Scalar control) when Generic communication profile is used.
* Fixed to 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD (bits 10, 13 and 14 are programmable).
99.99
10.01
3.99
1.02
1.01
ACTUAL SIGNAL/
PARAMETER
TABLE
DATA SET
TABLE
Block diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Rxxx
fieldbus adapter is used
Fieldbus
Adapter
(Slot 1)
201
Fieldbus control
Fieldbus control
40007
40008
40009
40001
40002
40003
Modbus
Controller
Standard
Modbus
Link
(RMBA)
(Slot 1/2)
Fieldbus
Adapter
(CH0)
3 words
(6 bytes)
3 words
(6 bytes)
3 words
(6 bytes)
3 words
(6 bytes)
DS 84
DS 83
DS 82
DS 81
DS 4
DS 3
DS 2
DS 1
DATA
SET
TABLE
255
255
90.05
90.04
REF5
REF4
REF3
AUXILIARY
REFERENCE
DATA SET
REF2
REF1
CW
MAIN
REFERENCE
DATA SET
98.02
CUSTOMISED
STD
MODBUS
ADVANT
FIELDBUS
NO
98.02
CUSTOMISED
STD
MODBUS
ADVANT
FIELDBUS
NO
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Nxxx
fieldbus adapter is used
90.01
11.06
11.03
10.02
10.01
Analogue Output
AO2 (see 15.06)
90.03
Analogue Output
AO1 (see 15.01)
90.02
Relay Outputs
(see 14.0114.03)
Bits
1315
COMM.REF
AI1
COMM.REF
AI1
COMM.CW
DI1
DI1
COMM.CW
11.02
89.99
10.02
10.01
PARAMETER
TABLE
01.12
EXT REF2
01.11
EXT REF1
03.01
MAIN CW
202
92.06
92.05
92.04
92.03
92.02
92.01*
ACT3
ACT4
ACT5
AUXILIARY
ACTUAL SIGNAL
DATA SET
STATUS WORD*
ACT1**
ACT2
MAIN
ACTUAL SIGNAL
DATA SET
DS 84
DS 83
DS 82
DS 81
DS 4
DS 3
DS 2
DS 1
3 words
(6 bytes)
3 words
(6 bytes)
3 words
(6 bytes)
3 words
(6 bytes)
** Fixed to 01.02 SPEED (DTC motor control) or 0103 FREQUENCY (Scalar control) when Generic communication profile is used.
* Fixed to 03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD (bits 10, 13 and 14 are programmable).
99.99
10.01
3.99
1.02
1.01
ACTUAL SIGNAL/
PARAMETER
TABLE
DATA SET
TABLE
Block Diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Nxxx
fieldbus adapter is used
Standard
Modbus
Link
Fieldbus
Adapter
(CH0)
40010
40011
40012
40004
40005
40006
Modbus
Controller
203
Fieldbus control
204
Communication profiles
The ACS800 supports three communication profiles:
ABB Drives communication profile
Generic Drive communication profile.
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile.
The ABB Drives communication profile should be selected with type Nxxx fieldbus
adapter modules, and when the manufacturer-specific mode is selected (via the
PLC) with type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules.
The Generic Drive profile is supported by type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules only.
The CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile can be selected for backward compatibility
with Application Program versions 2.8 and 3.0. This eliminates the need for
reprogramming the PLC when drives with the above-mentioned program versions
are replaced.
ABB Drives communication profile
The ABB Drives communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
ABB DRIVES. The Control Word, Status Word, and reference scaling for the profile
are described below.
The ABB Drives communication profile can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2.
The Control Word commands are in effect when par. 10.01 or 10.02 (whichever
control location is active) is set to COMM.CW.
Fieldbus control
205
Name
OFF1 CONTROL 1
Value
0
OFF2 CONTROL 1
0
OFF3 CONTROL 1
Enter STATE/Description
Enter READY TO OPERATE.
Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (22.03/22.05). Enter OFF1 ACTIVE;
proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
Emergency OFF, coast to stop.
Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
Emergency stop, stop within time defined by par. 22.07. Enter OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed
to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Enter OPERATION ENABLED. (Note: The Run Enable signal must be active; see
parameter 16.01. If par. 16.01 is set to COMM.CW, this bit also activates the Run
Enable signal.)
Normal operation.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED.
RAMP_IN_
ZERO
RESET
01
Warning: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
3
INHIBIT_
OPERATION
RAMP_OUT_
ZERO
RAMP_HOLD
11
12
15
INCHING_1
INCHING_2
REMOTE_CMD
Not in use.
10
Not in use.
Not in use.
10
Not in use.
Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control Word and Reference.
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control enabled.
Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.
Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if par. 11.02 is set to COMM.CW.
Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if par. 11.02 is set to COMM.CW.
Reserved
Fieldbus control
206
Name
Value
STATE/Description
RDY_ON
READY TO OPERATE.
OFF1 ACTIVE.
OPERATION ENABLED.
OPERATION INHIBITED.
1
2
3
4
RDY_RUN
RDY_REF
TRIPPED
OFF_2_STA
FAULT.
No fault.
OFF2 inactive.
OFF2 ACTIVE.
OFF_3_STA
OFF3 inactive.
OFF3 ACTIVE.
SWC_ON_INHIB
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0
7
ALARM
AT_SETPOINT
REMOTE
10
ABOVE_LIMIT
Warning/Alarm.
No Warning/Alarm.
Bit is read from the address defined by parameter 92.07 MSW B10 PTR.
The default value is signal 03.14 bit 9 ABOVE_LIMIT: Actual frequency or
speed value equals or exceeds the supervision limit (par. 32.02).
11
12
13
Bit is read from the address defined by parameter 92.08 MSW B13 PTR.
By default no address has been selected.
14
Bit is read from the address defined by parameter 92.09 MSW B14 PTR.
By default no address has been selected.
15
Fieldbus control
207
SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED
MAINS OFF
Power ON
ABB Drives
Communication
Profile
(SW Bit6=1)
(CW Bit0=0)
NOT READY
TO SWITCH ON
A B C D
(SW Bit0=0)
OPERATION
INHIBITED
CW = Control Word
SW = Status Word
n = Speed
I = Input Current
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
f = Frequency
(SW Bit0=1)
(SW Bit2=0)
from any state
operation
inhibited
FAULT
(SW Bit1=1)
OFF1
ACTIVE
(CW Bit7=1)
Emergency Stop
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0)
(CW Bit3=1
and
SW Bit12=1)
OFF3
ACTIVE
(SW Bit3=1)
(SW Bit5=0)
Emergency OFF
OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
OFF2
ACTIVE
(SW Bit4=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
(CW Bit4=0)
OPERATION
ENABLED
C D
(SW Bit2=1)
A
(CW Bit5=0)
D
B
(CW Bit6=0)
RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED
C
(CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
OPERATING
(SW Bit8=1)
Fieldbus control
208
Application
Macro used
(par. 99.02)
Range
Reference type
Scaling
Notes
REF1
(any)
-32768 ...
32767
Speed or Frequency
(not with
FAST COMM)
-1 = -[par. 11.04]
0 = [par. 11.04]
20000 = [par. 11.05]
Speed or Frequency
with FAST COMM
REF2
FACTORY,
HAND/AUTO,
or SEQ CTRL
T CTRL or
M/F (optional)
PID CTRL
Fieldbus control
-32768 ...
32767
-32768 ...
32767
-32768 ...
32767
Torque with
FAST COMM
PID Reference
(not with
FAST COMM)
209
Fieldbus control
210
Description
STOP
The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed according to the active deceleration ramp
(parameter 22.03 or 22.05).
START
The drive accelerates to the set reference value according to the active acceleration ramp (par.
22.02 or 22.04). The direction of rotation is determined by the sign of the reference value and the
setting of par. 10.03.
COAST STOP
The drive coasts to stop, i.e. the drive stops modulating. However, this command can be
overridden by the Brake Control function, which forces the drive to decelerate to zero speed by the
active deceleration ramp. When the Brake Control function is active, Coast stop and Emergency
coast stop (OFF2) commands given after the Emergency ramp stop (OFF3) coast the drive to
a stop.
QUICK STOP
The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed within the emergency stop deceleration time
defined by par. 22.07.
CURRENT LIMIT
STOP (CLS)
The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed according to the set current limit (par. 20.03) or
torque limit (20.04), whichever is first reached. The same procedure is valid in case of a Voltage
Limit Stop (VLS).
INCHING1
With this command active, the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 12 (defined by par.
12.13). After the command is removed, the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed.
Note: The speed reference ramps are not effective. The speed change rate is only limited by the
current (or torque) limit of the drive.
Note: Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2.
Note: Not effective in Scalar control mode.
INCHING2
With this command active, the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 13 (defined by par.
12.14). After the command is removed, the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed.
Note: The speed reference ramps are not effective. The speed change rate is only limited by the
current (or torque) limit of the drive.
Note: Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2.
Note: Not effective in Scalar control mode.
When active, forces the output of the reference function generator to zero.
RAMP HOLD
FORCED TRIP
Trips the drive. The drive will indicate fault FORCED TRIP.
RESET
Fieldbus control
211
Application
Macro used
(par. 99.02)
Range
Reference
type
Speed reference
scaling
Actual speed
scaling*
REF1
(any)
-32768...
32767
Speed or
Frequency
0=0
0=0
20000 =
[par. 99.08 (DTC) /
99.07 (scalar)]**
20000 = [par.
99.08 (DTC) /
99.07 (scalar)]**
-32768...
32767
Speed or Freq.
(not with
FAST COMM)
0=0
Speed or Freq.
with
FAST COMM
0=0
Torque
(not with
FAST COMM)
0=0
Torque with
FAST COMM
PID Reference
(not with
FAST COMM)
0=0
PID Reference
with
FAST COMM
0=0
REF2
FACTORY,
HAND/AUT
or SEQ
CTRL
T CTRL or
M/F
(optional)
PID CTRL
-32768...
32767
-32768...
32767
20000 = [par.
99.08 (DTC) /
99.07 (scalar)]**
20000 = [par.
99.08 (DTC) /
99.07 (scalar)]**
20000 = [par.
99.08 (DTC) /
99.07 (scalar)]**
0=0
20000 = [par.
99.08 (DTC) /
99.07 (scalar)]**
Notes
Final reference
limited by
20.01/20.02
[speed] or
20.07/20.08
[frequency]
Final reference
limited by
20.01/20.02
[speed] or
20.07/20.08
[frequency]
Final reference
limited by par.
20.04
Final reference
limited by par.
20.04
20000 = [par.
99.08 (DTC) /
99.07 (scalar)]**
20000 = [par.
99.08 (DTC) /
99.07 (scalar)]**
* With DTC the filter time of the actual speed value can be adjusted using parameter 34.04.
** Note: The maximum reference value is 163% (i.e. 163% = 1.63 value of parameter 99.08/99.07 value).
Fieldbus control
212
Name
Reserved
ENABLE
Reserved
START/STOP
Reserved
CNTRL_MODE
Value Description
1
Enabled.
Coast to stop.
0 1 Start.
0
Reserved
Reserved
RESET_FAULT
9 15
Reserved
Name
READY
ENABLE
Reserved
RUNNING
Reserved
REMOTE
Reserved
AT_SETPOINT
Value Description
1
Ready to start.
Enabled.
Coast to stop.
Stopped.
Drive at reference
FAULTED
1
0
No active faults
WARNING
A warning is active.
No active warnings
10
LIMIT
Drive at a limit
Drive at no limit
11 15 Reserved
The reference and actual scaling is equal to that of the ABB Drives profile.
Fieldbus control
213
Name
Reserved
OUT OF WINDOW
Reserved
MAGNETIZED
Reserved
Description
SYNC RDY
1 START NOT
DONE
IDENTIF RUN
DONE
START INHIBITION
LIMITING
10
TORQ CONTROL
11
ZERO SPEED
12
INTERNAL SPEED
FB
13
14 15
Reserved
Fieldbus control
214
Name
Active Limit
Pull-out limit
SPD_TOR_MIN_LIM
SPD_TOR_MAX_LIM
TORQ_USER_CUR_LIM
TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM
TORQ_MIN_LIM
TORQ_MAX_LIM
TREF_TORQ_MIN_LIM
TREF_TORQ_MAX_LIM
FLUX_MIN_LIM
10
FREQ_MIN_LIMIT
11
FREQ_MAX_LIMIT
12
DC_UNDERVOLT
DC undervoltage limit
13
DC_OVERVOLT
DC overvoltage limit
14
TORQUE LIMIT
15
FREQ_LIMIT
Fieldbus control
Bit
Name
Description
SHORT CIRC
OVERCURRENT
DC OVERVOLT
ACS800 TEMP
EARTH FAULT
THERMISTOR
MOTOR TEMP
SYSTEM_FAULT
UNDERLOAD
OVERFREQ
10 15
Reserved
215
Name
Description
SUPPLY PHASE
NO MOT DATA
DC UNDERVOLT
Reserved
RUN DISABLED
ENCODER ERR
I/O COMM
CTRL B TEMP
EXTERNAL FLT
OVER SWFREQ
10
11
PPCC LINK
12
COMM MODULE
13
PANEL LOSS
14
MOTOR STALL
15
MOTOR PHASE
Fieldbus control
216
Name
Description
FLT (F1_7)
USER MACRO
FLT (F1_4)
FLT (F1_5)
FLT (F2_12)
FLT (F2_13)
FLT (F2_14)
FLT (F2_15)
FLT (F2_16)
FLT (F2_17)
10
FLT (F2_18)
11
FLT (F2_19)
Illegal instruction
12
FLT (F2_3)
13
FLT (F2_1)
14
FLT (F2_0)
15
Reserved
Fieldbus control
Bit
Name
Description
START INHIBIT
Reserved
THERMISTOR
MOTOR TEMP
ACS800 TEMP
ENCODER ERR
T MEAS ALM
7 11
Reserved
12
COMM MODULE
13
Reserved
14
EARTH FAULT
15
Reserved
217
Name
Reserved
UNDERLOAD
Description
2, 3
Reserved
ENCODER
5, 6
Reserved
ALM (OS_17)
MOTOR STALL
10
11, 12
Reserved
13
PANEL LOSS
14, 15
Reserved
Name
Description
REVERSED
EXT CTRL
REF 2 SEL
Reference 2 is selected.
CONST SPEED
STARTED
USER 2 SEL
OPEN BRAKE
LOSS OF REF
STOP DI STATUS
READY
10
DATASET STATUS
11
MACRO CHG
1215
Reserved
Fieldbus control
218
Name
Description
SPEED 1 LIM
SPEED 2 LIM
CURRENT LIM
REF 1 LIM
REF 2 LIM
TORQUE 1 LIM
TORQUE 2 LIM
ACT 1 LIM
ACT 2 LIM
ABOVE_LIMIT
10
15
Reserved
Fieldbus control
Bit
Name
Description
CHOKE OTEMP
MOTOR 1 TEMP
MOTOR 2 TEMP
BRAKE ACKN
4 15
Reserved
219
Name
Description
FAN OTEMP
MOTOR 1 TEMP
MOTOR 2 TEMP
BRAKE ACKN
SLEEP MODE
MACRO CHANGING
6 15
Reserved
Name
Description
BR BROKEN
BR WIRING
BC SHORT CIR
BR OVERHEAT
BC OVERHEAT
IN CHOKE TEMP
PP OVERLOAD
INV DISABLED
TEMP DIF
10
INT CONFIG
11
USER L CURVE
12
Reserved
13
INV OVERTEMP
14...15
Reserved
Fieldbus control
220
Name
Description
REPLACE FAN
SYNCRO SPEED
BR OVERHEAT
BC OVERHEAT
IN CHOKE TEMP
PP OVERLOAD
INV DISABLED
CUR UNBAL
DC BUS LIM
10
11
12
13
USER L CURVE
14
Reserved
15
BATT FAILURE
Name
Description
AINT FAULT
AINT FAULT
AINT FAULT
AINT FAULT
AINT FAULT
5 15
Reserved
Fieldbus control
221
Name
Description
INTEGRAT 200
INTEGRAT 150
INTG PP TEMP
PP OVER TEMP
PP OVERLOAD
OVERLOAD CUR
CONT DC CUR
10
11...15
Reserved
Name
Description
INV OVERTEMP
1...2
Reserved
ENC CABLE
415
Reserved
Fieldbus control
222
Fieldbus control
Bit
Name
Description
EMSTOP MODULE
ERROR
FREE
STEPUP MODULE
ERROR
FREE
10
STEPUP MODULATING
STATUS
11
12-15
Reserved
223
Name
Description
INT 1 FLT
INT 2 FLT
INT 3 FLT
INT 4 FLT
INT 5 FLT
INT 6 FLT
INT 7 FLT
INT 8 FLT
INT 9 FLT
INT 10 FLT
10
INT 11 FLT
11
INT 12 FLT
12...14
Reserved
15
PBU FLT
Fieldbus control
224
Upper-leg IGBTs
RMIO
INT
RMIO
INT
PBU
Lower-leg IGBTs
RMIO
INT3
INT1 INT2
INT
INT
INT
...
Fieldbus control
Bit
Name
Description
U-PH SC U
U-PH SC L
V-PH SC U
V-PH SC L
W-PH SC U
W-PH SC L
6...15
Reserved
225
Fault tracing
Chapter overview
The chapter lists all warning and fault messages including the possible cause and
corrective actions.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. The Safety
Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual must be read
before you start working with the drive.
How to reset
The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad RESET key, by digital input or
fieldbus, or switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been
removed, the motor can be restarted.
Fault history
When a fault is detected, it is stored in the Fault History. The latest faults and
warnings are stored together with the time stamp at which the event was detected.
The fault logger collects 64 of the latest faults. When the drive power is switched off,
16 of the latest faults are stored.
See chapter Control panel for more information.
Fault tracing
226
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
ACS800 TEMP
(4210)
3.08 AW 1 bit 4
(programmable
Fault Function
30.01)
BACKUP USED
(5581)
3.18 AW 5 bit 15
(FFA3)
BATT FAILURE
BC OVERHEAT
(7114)
3.18 AW 5 bit 3
3.16 AW 4 bit 3
BR OVERHEAT
(7112)
3.18 AW 5 bit 2
Fault tracing
227
WARNING
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
COMM MODULE
(7510)
3.08 AW 1 bit 12
(programmable
Fault Function
30.18, 30.19)
CUR UNBAL xx
(2330)
3.08 AW1 bit 14 and
4.01
(programmable
Fault Function
30.17)
DC BUS LIM
(3211)
Informative alarm
(programmable
Fault Function
30.23)
EARTH FAULT
(2330)
3.08 AW 1 bit 14
(programmable
Fault Function
30.17)
ENC CABLE
(7310)
3.31 AW 6 bit 3
ENCODER A<>B
(7302)
3.09 AW 2 bit 4
ENCODER ERR
(7301)
3.08 AW 1 bit 5
Fault tracing
228
WARNING
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
FAN OTEMP
(FF83)
3.16 AW 4 bit 0
HW RECONF RQ
(FF33)
IN CHOKE TEMP
(FF38)
ID DONE
(FF32)
ID MAGN
(FF31)
ID MAGN REQ
(FF30)
ID N CHANGED
(FF68)
ID RUN
(FF35)
ID RUN SEL
(FF81)
3.18 AW 5 bit 4
3.18 AW 5 bit 8
(programmable
Fault Function
30.23)
INV DISABLED
(3200)
3.18 AW 5 bit 6
Fault tracing
Close DC switch.
Check AFSC-0x Fuse Switch Controller unit.
229
WARNING
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
INV OVERTEMP
(4290)
3.31 AW 6 bit 0
09.11 AW 3 bit 14
MOD CHOKE T
(FF89)
(7121)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.23)
MOTOR STALL
09.11 AW 3 bit 13
3.09 AW 2 bit 9
(programmable
Fault Function
30.10)
MOTOR STARTS
(FF34)
Fault tracing
230
WARNING
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
MOTOR TEMP
(4310)
3.08 AW 1 bit 3
(programmable
Fault Function
30.0430.09)
MOTOR 1 TEMP
(4312)
3.16 AW 4 bit 1
MOTOR 2 TEMP
(4313)
3.16 AW 4 bit 2
3.18 AW 5 bit 12
(FF85)
3.18 AW 5 bit 11
(programmable
Fault Function
30.23)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.23)
MOT TORQ LIM
Informative alarm
Informative alarm
Check parameter 20.13 MIN TORQ SEL and
20.14 MAX TORQ SEL settings.
Check Fault Function parameters.
If LIMIT WORD 1 bit 0 TORQ MOTOR LIM
is 1,
- check motor parameter settings (parameter
group 99 START-UP DATA)
- ensure that ID run has been completed
successfully.
PANEL LOSS
(5300)
3.09 AW 2 bit 13
(programmable
Fault Function
30.02)
POINTER ERROR
(FFD0)
->POWEROFF!
(FF39)
Fault tracing
231
WARNING
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
PP OVERLOAD
Replace fan.
(5482)
3.18 AW 5 bit 5
REPLACE FAN
(4280)
Reduce load.
3.18 AW 5 bit 0
SLEEP MODE
(FF8C)
3.16 AW 4 bit 4
START INHIBI
(FF7A)
AW 1 bit 0
START INTERL
(FF8D)
SYNCRO SPEED
(FF87)
3.18 AW 5 bit 1
TEMP DIF xx y
(4380)
4.01 FAULTED INT
INFO
Replace fan.
Check air filters.
3.08 AW 1 bit 2
3.08 AW 1 bit 6
UNDERLOAD
(FF6A)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.0430.05)
T MEAS ALM
(FF91)
3.09 AW 2 bit 1
(programmable
Fault Function
30.13)
Fault tracing
232
WARNING
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
USER L CURVE
(2312)
3.18 AW 5 bit 13
Fault tracing
Reduce load.
233
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
DOWNLOADING
FAILED
DRIVE IS
RUNNING
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
NO
COMMUNICATION
(X)
NO FREE ID
NUMBERS ID
NUMBER
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE
NOT UPLOADED
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
UPLOADING
FAILED
WRITE ACCESS
DENIED
PARAMETER
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE
Fault tracing
234
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
ACS800 TEMP
(4210)
3.05 FW 1 bit 3
ACS TEMP xx y
(4210)
3.05 FW 1 bit 3 and
4.01
(programmable
Fault Function
30.01)
BACKUP ERROR
(FFA2)
Retry.
Check connections.
Check that parameters are compatible with
drive.
BC OVERHEAT
(7114)
3.17 FW 5 bit 4
3.17 FW 5 bit 2
BRAKE ACKN
(FF74)
3.15 FW 4 bit 3
BR BROKEN
(7110)
3.17 FW 5 bit 0
BR OVERHEAT
(7112)
3.17 FW 5 bit 3
Fault tracing
235
FAULT
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
BR WIRING
(7111)
3.17 FW 5 bit 1
CHOKE OTEMP
(FF82)
COMM MODULE
(7510)
3.06 FW 2 bit 12
(programmable
Fault Function
30.18, 30.19)
CTRL B TEMP
(4110)
3.06 FW 2 bit 7
CURR MEAS
(2211)
CUR UNBAL xx
(2330)
DC HIGH RUSH
(FF80)
DC OVERVOLT
(3210)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.17)
3.05 FW 1 bit 2
Fault tracing
236
FAULT
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
DC UNDERVOLT
(3220)
3.06 FW 2 bit 2
3.05 FW 1 bit 4
(programmable
Fault Function
30.17)
ENCODER A<>B
(7302)
ENCODER ERR
(7301)
3.06 FW 2 bit 5
EXTERNAL FLT
(9000)
3.06 FW 2 bit 8
(programmable
Fault Function
30.03)
FORCED TRIP
(FF8F)
GD DISABLED
(FF53)
ID RUN FAIL
(FF84)
IN CHOKE TEMP
(FF81)
3.17 FW 5 bit 5
Fault tracing
237
FAULT
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
INT CONFIG
(5410)
03.17 FW 5 bit 10
Close DC switch.
(3200)
INV OVERTEMP
(4290)
3.17 FW 5 bit 13
3.06 FW 2 bit 6
Electromagnetic interference
LINE CONV
(FF51)
MOD BOARD T
(FF88)
MOD CHOKE T
(FF89)
Fault tracing
238
FAULT
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
MOTOR PHASE
(FF56)
3.06 FW 2 bit 15
(programmable
Fault Function
30.16)
MOTOR STALL
(7121)
3.06 FW 2 bit 14
(programmable
Fault Function
30.1030.12)
MOTOR TEMP
(4310)
3.05 FW 1 bit 6
(programmable
Fault Function
30.0430.09)
MOTOR 1 TEMP
(4312)
3.15 FW 4 bit 1
MOTOR 2 TEMP
(4313)
3.15 FW 4 bit 2
NO MOT DATA
(FF52)
3.06 FW 2 bit 1
OVERCURR xx
(2310)
3.05 FW 1 bit 1 and
4.01
OVERCURRENT
(2310)
3.05 FW 1 bit 1
Fault tracing
239
FAULT
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
OVERFREQ
(7123)
3.05 FW 1 bit 9
(FF55)
3.06 FW 2 bit 9
PANEL LOSS
(5300)
3.06 FW 2 bit 13
(programmable
Fault Function
30.02)
PARAM CRC
(6320)
POWERFAIL
(3381)
3.17 FW 5 bit 9
PPCC LINK
(5210)
3.06 FW 2 bit 11
Fault tracing
240
FAULT
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
PPCC LINK xx
(5210)
3.06 FW 2 bit 11 and
4.01
PP OVERLOAD
(5482)
3.17 FW 5 bit 6
RUN DISABLED
(FF54)
3.06 FW 2 bit 4
SC INV xx y
(2340)
3.05 FW 1 bit 0, 4.01
and 4.02
SHORT CIRC
(2340)
SLOT OVERLAP
(FF8A)
START INHIBI
(FF7A)
3.03 bit 8
SUPPLY PHASE
(3130)
3.06 FW 2 bit 0
Fault tracing
241
FAULT
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
THERMISTOR
(4311)
3.05 FW 1 bit 5
(programmable
Fault Function
30.0430.05)
UNDERLOAD
(FF6A)
3.05 FW 1 bit 8
(programmable
Fault Function
30.1330.15)
USER L CURVE
(2312)
3.17 FW 5 bit 11
USER MACRO
(FFA1)
Fault tracing
242
Fault tracing
243
244
Setting
RAIO-SLOT1
BIPO AI5
FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST(1
EXT1
AI5
minREF1
maxREF1
minAI5
maxAI5
100%
NO
(2
The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input AI1 of
the extension module.
Operation Range
scaled
maxREF1
Speed Reference
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST1)
minREF1
-minREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST1)
-scaled
maxREF1
-maxAI5
-minAI5
minAI5
maxAI5
=
=
=
=
the negative speed range, the drive must receive a separate reverse command.
Set if supervision of living zero is used.
245
Setting
RAIO-SLOT1
BIPO AI5
FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST(1
EXT1
AI5/JOYST
minREF1
maxREF1
minAI5
maxAI5
100%
NO
(2
The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input AI1 of
the extension module in joystick mode.
Operation Range
scaled
maxREF1
Speed Reference
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST1)
minREF1
-minREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST1)
-scaled
maxREF1
-maxAI5
-minAI5
minAI5
maxAI5
=
=
=
=
1) Enables
2)
246
247
Definition
PB
FbEq
Fieldbus addresses
Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA-01, RDNA-01, etc.)
See the appropriate fieldbus adapter module Users Manual.
Nxxx adapter modules (such as NPBA-12, NDNA-02, etc.)
NPBA-12 Profibus Adapter:
All versions
see column PB in the tables below.
Version 1.5 or later
see NPBA-12 PROFIBUS Adapter Installation and Start-Up
Guide [3BFE64341588 (English)].
NIBA-01 InterBus-S Adapter:
xxyy 100 + 12288 converted into hexadecimal, where xxyy = drive parameter
number
Example: The index number for drive parameter 13.09 is 1309 + 12288 = 13597
(dec) = 351D (hex)
NMBP-01 ModbusPlus Adapter and NMBA-01 Modbus Adapter:
4xxyy, where xxyy = drive parameter number
248
Actual signals
Index Name
01
ACTUAL SIGNALS
01.01 PROCESS VARIABLE
Short name
FbEq
Unit
PROC VAR
1=1
01.02 SPEED
SPEED
According to
parameter 34.02
rpm
01.03 FREQUENCY
FREQ
01.04 CURRENT
01.05 TORQUE
CURRENT
TORQUE
01.06 POWER
POWER
01.07
01.08
01.09
01.10
01.11
01.12
DC BUS V
MAINS V
OUT VOLT
ACS TEMP
EXT REF1
EXT REF2
-20000 = -100%
20000 = 100% of
motor absolute max.
speed
-100 = -1 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
Hz
10 = 1 A
A
-10000 = -100%
%
10000 = 100% of
motor nominal torque
-1000 = -100% 1000 %
= 100% of motor
nominal power
1=1V
V
1=1V
V
1=1V
V
10 = 1%
%
1 = 1 rpm
rpm
0 = 0% 10000 =
%
100% 1)
(1,2) LOCAL; (3)
EXT1; (4) EXT2
1=1h
h
1 = 100 kWh
kWh
%
0 = 0% 10000 =
100%
1=1
1 = 0.001 V
V
1 = 0.001 mA
mA
1 = 0.001 mA
mA
1=1
1 =0.001 mA
mA
1 = 0.001 mA
mA
0 = 0% 10000 =
%
100%
0 = 0% 10000 =
%
100%
-10000 = -100%
%
10000 = 100%
17
DC BUS VOLTAGE V
MAINS VOLTAGE
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
ACS800 TEMP
EXTERNAL REF 1
EXTERNAL REF 2
CTRL LOC
DI6-1 STATUS
AI1 [V]
AI2 [mA]
AI3 [mA]
RO3-1 STATUS
AO1 [mA]
AO2 [mA]
ACTUAL VALUE 1
DI6-1
AI1 [V]
AI2 [mA]
AI3 [mA]
RO3-1
AO1 [mA]
AO2 [mA]
ACT VAL1
ACT VAL2
EXT AO1
EXT AO2
PP 1 TEM
PP 2 TEM
PP 3 TEM
PP 4 TEM
ACT V
01.35
01.36
01.37
01.38
MOTOR 1 TEMP
MOTOR 2 TEMP
MOTOR TEMP EST
AI5 [mA]
M 1 TEMP
M 2 TEMP
MOTOR TE
AI5 [mA]
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 0.001 mA
1 = 1C
1 = 1C
1 = 1C
1 = 1C
0 = 0% 10000 =
100%
1 = 1C/ohm
1 = 1C/ohm
1 = 1C
1 = 0.001 mA
Range
PB
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
LOCAL; EXT1;
EXT2
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
mA
mA
C
C
C
C
%
According to
27
parameter 99.02
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
C
C
C
mA
35
36
37
38
249
Index Name
Short name
01.39 AI6 [mA]
AI6 [mA]
01.40 DI7-12 STATUS
DI7...12
01.41 EXT RO STATUS
EXT RO
01.42 PROCESS SPEED REL P SPEED
01.43 MOTOR RUN TIME
MOTOR RUN TIME
01.44 FAN ON-TIME
FAN TIME
01.45 CTRL BOARD TEMP
CTRL B T
02
ACTUAL SIGNALS
02.01 SPEED REF 2
S REF 2
02.02 SPEED REF 3
S REF 3
02.09
02.10
02.13
02.14
TORQUE REF 2
TORQUE REF 3
TORQ USED REF
FLUX REF
T REF 2
T REF 3
T USED R
FLUX REF
SPEED ES
SPEED ME
02.19 MOTOR
ACCELERATIO
02.20 USER CURRENT
03
ACTUAL SIGNALS
03.01 MAIN CTRL WORD
MOTOR AC
USER CUR
MAIN SW
AUX SW
LIMIT W1
FAULT W1
FAULT W2
SYS FLT
ALARM W1
ALARM W2
FOLL MCW
MAIN CW
FAULT W4
ALARM W4
FAULT W5
ALARM W5
INT INIT
FbEq
1 = 0.001 mA
1=1
1=1
1=1
1 = 10 h
10 h = 1
1=1
Unit
mA
0 = 0% 20000 =
100% of motor
absolute max. speed
0 = 0% 10000 =
100% of motor
nominal torque
0 = 0% 10000 =
100%
0 = 0% 20000 =
100% of motor
absolute max. speed
1 = 1 rpm/s.
10 = 1%
2)
Range
%
h
h
C
PB
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
rpm
rpm
51
52
%
%
%
%
59
60
63
64
rpm
rpm
67
68
rpm/s
69
70
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
86
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
250
Index Name
03.20 LATEST FAULT
Short name
LAST FLT
FbEq
2.FAULT
3.FAULT
4.FAULT
5.FAULT
LAST WRN
2.WARN
3.WARN
4.WARN
5.WARN
LIMIT WO
ALARM W6
E IO ST
04
ACTUAL SIGNALS
04.01 FAULTED INT INFO
FLTD INT
INT SC
09
09.01
09.02
09.03
09.04
09.05
09.06
ACTUAL SIGNALS
AI1 SCALED
AI2 SCALED
AI3 SCALED
AI5 SCALED
AI6 SCALED
DS MCW
AI1 SCAL
AI2 SCAL
AI3 SCAL
AI5 SCAL
AI6 SCAL
DS MCW
20000 = 10 V
20000 = 20 mA
20000 = 20 mA
20000 = 20 mA
20000 = 20 mA
0...65535 (Decimal)
09.07
09.08
09.09
09.10
09.11
09.12
09.13
MASTER REF1
MASTER REF2
AUX DS VAL1
AUX DS VAL2
AUX DS VAL3
LCU ACT SIGNAL1
LCU ACT SIGNAL2
M REF1
M REF2
AUX DSV1
AUX DSV2
AUX DSV3
LCU ACT1
LCU ACT2
-3276832767
-3276832767
-3276832767
-3276832767
-3276832767
1=1
1=1
Unit
Range
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
065535
(Decimal)
PB
95
96
97
98
99
100
0...65535
(Decimal)
0...65535
(Decimal)
020000
020000
020000
020000
020000
0...65535
(Decimal)
-3276832767
-3276832767
-3276832767
-3276832767
-3276832767
-
1) Percent of motor max. speed / nominal torque / max. process reference (depending on the ACS800
macro selected).
2) The contents of these data words are detailed in chapter Fieldbus control. For the contents of Actual
Signal 3.11, see the Master/Follower Application Guide [3AFE64590430 (English)].
251
Parameters
Index Name/Selection
10
START/STOP/DIR
10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR
10.02
10.03
10.04
10.05
10.06
10.07
10.08
11
11.01
11.02
11.03
11.04
11.05
11.06
11.07
11.08
11.09
11.10
11.11
12
12.01
12.02
12.03
12.04
12.05
12.06
12.07
12.08
12.09
12.10
12.11
12.12
12.13
12.14
12.15
12.16
13
13.01
13.02
13.03
13.04
13.05
13.06
13.07
13.08
13.09
13.10
13.11
13.12
13.13
13.14
13.15
13.16
EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR
REF DIRECTION
EXT 1 STRT PTR
EXT 2 STRT PTR
JOG SPEED SELECT
NET CONTROL
NET REFERENCE
REFERENCE SELECT
KEYPAD REF SEL
EXT1/EXT2 SELECT
EXT REF1 SELECT
EXT REF 1 MINIMUM
EXT REF 1 MAXIMUM
EXT REF2 SELECT
EXT REF 2 MINIMUM
EXT REF 2 MAXIMUM
EXT 1/2 SEL PTR
EXT 1 REF PTR
EXT 2 REF PTR
CONSTANT SPEEDS
CONST SPEED SEL
CONST SPEED 1
CONST SPEED 2
CONST SPEED 3
CONST SPEED 4
CONST SPEED 5
CONST SPEED 6
CONST SPEED 7
CONST SPEED 8
CONST SPEED 9
CONST SPEED 10
CONST SPEED 11
CONST SPEED 12
CONST SPEED 13
CONST SPEED 14
CONST SPEED 15
ANALOGUE INPUTS
MINIMUM AI1
MAXIMUM AI1
SCALE AI1
FILTER AI1
INVERT AI1
MINIMUM AI2
MAXIMUM AI2
SCALE AI2
FILTER AI2
INVERT AI2
MINIMUM AI3
MAXIMUM AI3
SCALE AI3
FILTER AI3
INVERT AI3
MINIMUM AI5
FACTORY
HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL
T-CTRL
SEQ CTRL
PB
DI1,2 (US:
DI1P,2P,3)
NOT SEL
FORWARD
0
0
NOT SEL
0
0
DI1,2
DI1
DI1,2
DI1,2
101 W
DI6,5
REQUEST
0
0
NOT SEL
0
0
DI6
FORWARD
0
0
NOT SEL
0
0
DI1,2
REQUEST
0
0
NOT SEL
0
0
NOT SEL
REQUEST
0
NOT SEL
0
0
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
REF1 (rpm)
EXT1
AI1
0 rpm
1500 rpm
KEYPAD
0%
100%
0
0
0
REF1 (rpm)
DI3
AI1
0 rpm
1500 rpm
AI2
0%
100%
0
0
0
REF1 (rpm)
DI3
AI1
0 rpm
1500 rpm
AI1
0%
100%
0
0
0
REF1 (rpm)
DI3
AI1
0 rpm
1500 rpm
AI2
0%
100%
0
0
0
REF1 (rpm)
EXT1
AI1
0 rpm
1500 rpm
AI1
0%
100%
0
0
0
126
127 W
128 W
129
130
131 W
132
133
134
135
136
DI5,6
300 rpm
600 rpm
900 rpm
300 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
DI4(SPEED4)
300 rpm
600 rpm
900 rpm
300 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
DI4(SPEED4)
300 rpm
600 rpm
900 rpm
300 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
DI4(SPEED4)
300 rpm
600 rpm
900 rpm
300 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
DI4,5,6
300 rpm
600 rpm
900 rpm
1200 rpm
1500 rpm
2400 rpm
3000 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
0V
10 V
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
0V
10 V
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
0V
10 V
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
0V
10 V
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
0V
10 V
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
W
W
W
W
W
252
Index Name/Selection
13.17 MAXIMUM AI5
13.18 SCALE AI5
13.19 FILTER AI5
13.20 INVERT AI5
13.21 MINIMUM AI6
13.22 MAXIMUM AI6
13.23 SCALE AI6
13.24 FILTER AI6
13.25 INVERT AI6
14
RELAY OUTPUTS
14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT
14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT
14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT
14.04 RO1 TON DELAY
14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY
14.06 RO2 TON DELAY
14.07 RO2 TOFF DELAY
14.08 RO3 TON DELAY
14.09 RO3 TOFF DELAY
14.10 DIO MOD1 RO1
14.11 DIO MOD1 RO2
14.12 DIO MOD2 RO1
14.13 DIO MOD2 RO2
14.14 DIO MOD3 RO1
14.15 DIO MOD3 RO2
14.16 RO PTR1
14.17 RO PTR2
14.18 RO PTR3
14.19 RO PTR4
14.20 RO PTR5
14.21 RO PTR6
14.22 RO PTR7
14.23 RO PTR8
14.24 RO PTR9
15
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1
15.02 INVERT AO1
15.03 MINIMUM AO1
15.04 FILTER AO1
15.05 SCALE AO1
15.06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT2
15.07 INVERT AO2
15.08 MINIMUM AO2
15.09 FILTER AO2
15.10 SCALE AO2
15.11 AO1 PTR
15.12 AO2 PTR
16
SYS CTRL INPUTS
16.01 RUN ENABLE
16.02 PARAMETER LOCK
16.03 PASS CODE
16.04 FAULT RESET SEL
16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG
16.06 LOCAL LOCK
16.07 PARAMETER SAVE
16.08 RUN ENA PTR
16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY
FACTORY
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
HAND/AUTO
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
PID-CTRL
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
T-CTRL
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
SEQ CTRL
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
0 mA
20 mA
100%
0.10 s
NO
PB W
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
READY
RUNNING
FAULT(-1)
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
WARNING
REF 2 SEL
AT SPEED
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
READY
RUNNING
FAULT(-1)
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
WARNING
REF 2 SEL
AT SPEED
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
READY
RUNNING
FAULT(-1)
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
WARNING
REF 2 SEL
AT SPEED
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
READY
RUNNING
FAULT(-1)
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
WARNING
REF 2 SEL
AT SPEED
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
READY
RUNNING
FAULT(-1)
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.0 s
READY
RUNNING
FAULT
WARNING
REF 2 SEL
AT SPEED
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
SPEED
NO
0 mA
0.10 s
100%
CURRENT
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
SPEED
NO
0 mA
0.10 s
100%
CURRENT
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
SPEED
NO
0 mA
0.10 s
100%
CURRENT
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
SPEED
NO
0 mA
0.10 s
100%
CURRENT
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
SPEED
NO
0 mA
0.10 s
100%
CURRENT
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
226 W
227
228
229
230
231 W
232
233
234
235
236
237
YES
OPEN
0
NOT SEL
NOT SEL
OFF
DONE
0
INTERNAL
24V
YES
OPEN
0
NOT SEL
NOT SEL
OFF
DONE
0
INTERNAL
24V
DI5
OPEN
0
NOT SEL
NOT SEL
OFF
DONE
0
INTERNAL
24V
DI6
OPEN
0
NOT SEL
NOT SEL
OFF
DONE
0
INTERNAL
24V
YES
OPEN
0
NOT SEL
NOT SEL
OFF
DONE
0
INTERNAL
24V
251 W
252
253
254 W
255 W
256
257
258
259
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
253
Index Name/Selection
16.10 ASSIST SEL
16.11 FAULT RESET PTR
20
LIMITS
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED
20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT
20.04 TORQ MAX LIM1
20.05 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL
20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL
20.07 MINIMUM FREQ
20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ
20.11 P MOTORING LIM
20.12 P GENERATING LIM
20.13 MIN TORQ SEL
20.14
20.15
20.16
20.17
20.18
20.19
20.20
20.21
21
21.01
21.02
21.03
21.04
21.05
21.06
21.07
21.08
21.09
21.10
22
22.01
22.02
22.03
22.04
22.05
22.06
22.07
22.08
22.09
23
23.01
23.02
23.03
23.04
23.05
23.06
23.07
24
24.01
24.02
25
25.01
25.02
FACTORY
ON
0
HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL
ON
ON
0
0
T-CTRL
ON
0
SEQ CTRL
ON
0
PB W
260
261
(calculated)
(calculated)
type specific
300%
ON
ON
- 50 Hz
50 Hz
300%
-300%
NEG MAX
TORQ
MAX LIM1
0.0%
0.0%
300.0%
0
0
0%
300%
(calculated)
(calculated)
type specific
300%
ON
ON
- 50 Hz
50 Hz
300%
-300%
NEG MAX
TORQ
MAX LIM1
0.0%
0.0%
300.0%
0
0
0%
300%
(calculated)
(calculated)
type specific
300%
ON
ON
- 50 Hz
50 Hz
300%
-300%
NEG MAX
TORQ
MAX LIM1
0.0%
0.0%
300.0%
0
0
0%
300%
(calculated)
(calculated)
type specific
300%
ON
ON
- 50 Hz
50 Hz
300%
-300%
NEG MAX
TORQ
MAX LIM1
0.0%
0.0%
300.0%
0
0
0%
300%
(calculated)
(calculated)
type specific
300%
ON
ON
- 50 Hz
50 Hz
300%
-300%
NEG MAX
TORQ
MAX LIM1
0.0%
0.0%
300.0%
0
0
0%
300%
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
AUTO
500.0 ms
COAST
NO
5 rpm
30%
COAST STOP
NO
OFF2 STOP
0.5 s
AUTO
500.0 ms
COAST
NO
5 rpm
30%
COAST STOP
NO
OFF2 STOP
0.5 s
AUTO
500.0 ms
COAST
NO
5 rpm
30%
COAST STOP
NO
OFF2 STOP
0.5 s
AUTO
500.0 ms
COAST
NO
5 rpm
30%
COAST STOP
NO
OFF2 STOP
0.5 s
AUTO
500.0 ms
RAMP
NO
5 rpm
30%
COAST STOP
NO
OFF2 STOP
0.5 s
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
DI4
20 s
20 s
60.00 s
60.00 s
0.00 s
3.00 s
0
0
ACC/DEC 1
20 s
20 s
60.00 s
60.00 s
0.00 s
3.00 s
0
0
ACC/DEC 1
20 s
20 s
60.00 s
60.00 s
0.00 s
3.00 s
0
0
DI5
20 s
20 s
60.00 s
60.00 s
0.00 s
3.00 s
0
0
DI3
20 s
20 s
60.00 s
60.00 s
0.00 s
3.00 s
0
0
401 W
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
10
2.50 s
0.0 ms
0.00 s
100.0%
NO
8 ms
10
2.50 s
0.0 ms
0.00 s
100.0%
NO
8 ms
10
2.50 s
0.0 ms
0.00 s
100.0%
NO
8 ms
10
2.50 s
0.0 ms
0.00 s
100.0%
NO
8 ms
10
2.50 s
0.0 ms
0.12 s
100.0%
NO
8 ms
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
0.00 s
0.00 s
OFF
0 rpm
OFF
0 rpm
OFF
0 rpm
OFF
0 rpm
W
W
W
W
W
451
452
OFF
0 rpm
476
477
254
Index Name/Selection
25.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH
25.04 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW
25.05 CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH
25.06 CRIT SPEED 3 LOW
25.07 CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH
26
MOTOR CONTROL
26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION
26.02 FLUX BRAKING
26.03 IR-COMPENSATION
26.04 IR STEP-UP FREQ
26.05 HEX FIELD WEAKEN
26.06 FLUX REF PTR
26.07 FLYSTART CUR REF [%]
26.08 FLYSTART INIT DLY
26.09 FS METHOD
26.10 RS20 [mOhm]
27
BRAKE CHOPPER
27.01 BRAKE CHOPPER CTL
27.02 BR OVERLOAD FUNC
27.03 BR RESISTANCE
27.04 BR THERM TCONST
27.05 MAX CONT BR POWER
27.06 BC CTRL MODE
30
FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION
30.02 PANEL LOSS
30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT
30.04 MOTOR THERM PROT
30.05 MOT THERM P MODE
30.06
30.07
30.08
30.09
30.10
30.11
30.12
30.13
30.14
30.15
30.16
30.17
30.18
30.19
30.20
30.21
30.22
30.23
31
31.01
31.02
31.03
31.04
31.05
31.06
31.07
31.08
FACTORY
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
HAND/AUTO
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
PID-CTRL
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
T-CTRL
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
SEQ CTRL
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
PB W
478
479
480
481
482
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
501
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
502
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
503
0
0
0
0
0
504
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
505
C.10000
C.10000
C.10000
C.10000
C.10000
506
60%
60%
60%
60%
60%
507
25
25
25
25
25
508
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
509
(Set in ID run.) (Set in ID run.) (Set in ID run.) (Set in ID run.) (Set in ID run.) 510
OFF
NO
OFF
NO
OFF
NO
OFF
NO
OFF
NO
FAULT
FAULT
NOT SEL
NO
DTC/USER
MODE
(calculated)
100.0%
74.0%
45.0 Hz
FAULT
20.0 Hz
20.00 s
NO
600.0 s
1
NO
FAULT
FAULT
3.00 s
ZERO
3.0 s
WARNING
0
FAULT
FAULT
NOT SEL
NO
DTC/USER
MODE
(calculated)
100.0%
74.0%
45.0 Hz
FAULT
20.0 Hz
20.00 s
NO
600.0 s
1
NO
FAULT
FAULT
3.00 s
ZERO
3.0 s
WARNING
0
FAULT
FAULT
NOT SEL
NO
DTC/USER
MODE
(calculated)
100.0%
74.0%
45.0 Hz
FAULT
20.0 Hz
20.00 s
NO
600.0 s
1
NO
FAULT
FAULT
3.00 s
ZERO
3.0 s
WARNING
0
FAULT
FAULT
NOT SEL
NO
DTC/USER
MODE
(calculated)
100.0%
74.0%
45.0 Hz
FAULT
20.0 Hz
20.00 s
NO
600.0 s
1
NO
FAULT
FAULT
3.00 s
ZERO
3.0 s
WARNING
0
FAULT
FAULT
NOT SEL
NO
DTC/USER
MODE
(calculated)
100.0%
74.0%
45.0 Hz
FAULT
20.0 Hz
20.00 s
NO
600.0 s
1
NO
FAULT
FAULT
3.00 s
ZERO
3.0 s
WARNING
0
601
602
603
604
605
0
30.0 s
0.0 s
NO
NO
0
30.0 s
0.0 s
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
0
30.0 s
0.0 s
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
0
30.0 s
0.0 s
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
0
30.0 s
0.0 s
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
526 W
527
528
0s
0s
0s
0s
0s
529
0 kW
0 kW
0 kW
0 kW
0 kW
530
COMMON DC COMMON DC COMMON DC COMMON DC COMMON DC 531
NO
NO
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
255
Index Name/Selection
32
SUPERVISION
32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION
32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT
32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION
32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT
32.05 CURRENT FUNCTION
32.06 CURRENT LIMIT
32.07 TORQUE 1 FUNCTION
32.08 TORQUE 1 LIMIT
32.09 TORQUE 2 FUNCTION
32.10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT
32.11 REF1 FUNCTION
32.12 REF1 LIMIT
32.13 REF2 FUNCTION
32.14 REF2 LIMIT
32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION
32.16 ACT1 LIMIT
32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION
32.18 ACT2 LIMIT
33
INFORMATION
33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION
33.02 APPL SW VERSION
33.03 TEST DATE
33.04 BOARD TYPE
34
34.01
34.02
34.03
34.04
34.05
34.06
35
35.01
35.02
35.03
35.04
35.05
35.06
35.07
40
40.01
40.02
40.03
40.04
40.05
40.06
40.07
40.08
40.09
40.10
40.11
40.12
40.13
40.14
40.15
40.16
40.17
PROCESS VARIABLE
SCALE
P VAR UNIT
SELECT P VAR
MOTOR SP FILT TIM
TORQ ACT FILT TIM
RESET RUN TIME
MOT TEMP MEAS
MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL
MOT 1 TEMP ALM L
MOT 1 TEMP FLT L
MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL
MOT 2 TEMP ALM L
MOT 2 TEMP FLT L
MOT MOD COMPENSAT
PID CONTROL
PID GAIN
PID INTEG TIME
PID DERIV TIME
PID DERIV FILTER
ERROR VALUE INV
ACTUAL VALUE SEL
ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL
ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL
ACT1 MINIMUM
ACT1 MAXIMUM
ACT2 MINIMUM
ACT2 MAXIMUM
PID INTEGRATION
TRIM MODE
TRIM REF SEL
TRIM REFERENCE
TRIM RANGE ADJUST
FACTORY
HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL
T-CTRL
SEQ CTRL
PB
NO
0 rpm
NO
0 rpm
NO
0
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0 rpm
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0 rpm
NO
0 rpm
NO
0
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0 rpm
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0 rpm
NO
0 rpm
NO
0
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0 rpm
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0 rpm
NO
0 rpm
NO
0
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0 rpm
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0 rpm
NO
0 rpm
NO
0
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0 rpm
NO
0%
NO
0%
NO
0%
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
(Version)
(Version)
(Date)
(Control board
type)
(Version)
(Version)
(Date)
(Control board
type)
(Version)
(Version)
(Date)
(Control board
type)
(Version)
(Version)
(Date)
(Control board
type)
(Version)
(Version)
(Date)
(Control board
type)
676
677
678
679
100
%
142
500 ms
100 ms
NO
100
%
142
500 ms
100 ms
NO
100
%
142
500 ms
100 ms
NO
100
%
142
500 ms
100 ms
NO
100
%
142
500 ms
100 ms
NO
701
702
703
704
705
706
NOT IN USE
110
130
NOT IN USE
110
130
YES
NOT IN USE
110
130
NOT IN USE
110
130
YES
NOT IN USE
110
130
NOT IN USE
110
130
YES
NOT IN USE
110
130
NOT IN USE
110
130
YES
NOT IN USE
110
130
NOT IN USE
110
130
YES
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
1
60.00 s
0.00 s
1.00 s
NO
ACT1
AI2
AI2
0
100%
0%
100%
ON
OFF
AI1
0.0%
100.0%
1
60.00 s
0.00 s
1.00 s
NO
ACT1
AI2
AI2
0
100%
0%
100%
ON
OFF
AI1
0.0%
100.0%
1
60.00 s
0.00 s
1.00 s
NO
ACT1
AI2
AI2
0
100%
0%
100%
ON
1
60.00 s
0.00 s
1.00 s
NO
ACT1
AI2
AI2
0
100%
0%
100%
ON
OFF
AI1
0.0%
100.0%
1
60.00 s
0.00 s
1.00 s
NO
ACT1
AI2
AI2
0
100%
0%
100%
ON
OFF
AI1
0.0%
100.0%
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
0.0%
100.0%
256
Index Name/Selection
40.18 TRIM SELECTION
40.19 ACTUAL FILT TIME
40.20 SLEEP SELECTION
40.21 SLEEP LEVEL
40.22 SLEEP DELAY
40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL
40.24 WAKE UP DELAY
40.25 ACTUAL1 PTR
40.26 PID MINIMUM
40.27 PID MAXIMUM
40.28 TRIM REF PTR
42
BRAKE CONTROL
42.01 BRAKE CTRL
42.02 BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE
42.03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY
42.04 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY
42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD
42.06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC
42.07 START TORQ REF SEL
42.08 START TORQ REF
42.09 EXTEND RUN T
42.10 LOW REF BRK HOLD
50
ENCODER MODULE
50.01 PULSE NR
50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE
50.03 ENCODER FAULT
50.04 ENCODER DELAY
50.05 ENCODER DDCS CH
50.06 SPEED FB SEL
50.07 ENC CABLE CHECK
51
COMM MOD DATA
52
52.01
52.02
52.03
60
60.01
60.02
60.03
60.04
60.05
60.06
60.07
60.08
70
70.01
70.02
70.03
70.04
70.05
72
72.01
72.02
72.03
72.04
72.05
72.06
STANDARD MODBUS
STATION NUMBER
BAUDRATE
PARITY
MASTER/FOLLOWER
MASTER LINK MODE
TORQUE SELECTOR
WINDOW SEL ON
WINDOW WIDTH POS
WINDOW WIDTH NEG
DROOP RATE
MASTER SIGNAL 2
MASTER SIGNAL 3
DDCS CONTROL
CHANNEL 0 ADDR
CHANNEL 3 ADDR
CH1 BAUDRATE
CH0 DDCS HW CONN
CH2 HW CONNECTION
USER LOAD CURVE
OVERLOAD FUNC
LOAD CURRENT 1
LOAD CURRENT 2
LOAD CURRENT 3
LOAD CURRENT 4
LOAD CURRENT 5
FACTORY
HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL
0.04 s
OFF
0.0 rpm
0.0 s
0%
0.0 s
0
-100.0%
100.0%
0
T-CTRL
SPEED TRIM
0.04 s
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
0
-100.0%
100.0%
0
0.04 s
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
0
-100.0%
100.0%
0
0.04 s
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
0
-100.0%
100.0%
0
OFF
OFF
0.0 s
0.0 s
10 rpm
FAULT
NO
0%
0.0 s
0.0 s
0.04 s
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
0
-100.0%
100.0%
0
PB W
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
-
OFF
OFF
0.0 s
0.0 s
10 rpm
FAULT
NO
0%
0.0 s
0.0 s
OFF
OFF
0.0 s
0.0 s
10 rpm
FAULT
NO
0%
0.0 s
0.0 s
OFF
OFF
0.0 s
0.0 s
10 rpm
FAULT
NO
0%
0.0 s
0.0 s
OFF
OFF
0.0 s
0.0 s
10 rpm
FAULT
NO
0%
0.0 s
0.0 s
2048
A --- B --WARNING
1000
CHANNEL 1
INTERNAL
NO
2048
A --- B --WARNING
1000
CHANNEL 1
INTERNAL
NO
2048
A --- B --WARNING
1000
CHANNEL 1
INTERNAL
NO
2048
A --- B --WARNING
1000
CHANNEL 1
INTERNAL
NO
2048
A --- B --WARNING
1000
CHANNEL 1
INTERNAL
NO
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1026
...
1
9600
ODD
1
9600
ODD
1
9600
ODD
1
9600
ODD
1
9600
ODD
1051
1052
1053
NOT IN USE
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
0
202
213
NOT IN USE
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
0
202
213
NOT IN USE
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
0
202
213
NOT IN USE
TORQUE
NO
0
0
0
202
213
NOT IN USE
not visible
not visible
not visible
not visible
0
202
213
1195
1196
1167
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1
1
4 Mbit/s
RING
RING
1
1
4 Mbit/s
RING
RING
1
1
4 Mbit/s
RING
RING
1
1
4 Mbit/s
RING
RING
1
1
4 Mbit/s
RING
RING
1375
1376
1377
1378
NO
500
500
500
500
500
NO
500
500
500
500
500
NO
500
500
500
500
500
NO
500
500
500
500
500
NO
500
500
500
500
500
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
SEQ CTRL
257
Index Name/Selection
72.07 LOAD CURRENT 6
72.08 LOAD CURRENT 7
72.09 LOAD CURRENT 8
72.10 LOAD FREQ 1
72.11 LOAD FREQ 2
72.12 LOAD FREQ 3
72.13 LOAD FREQ 4
72.14 LOAD FREQ 5
72.15 LOAD FREQ 6
72.16 LOAD FREQ 7
72.17 LOAD FREQ 8
72.18 LOAD CURRENT LIMIT
72.19 LOAD THERMAL TIME
72.20 LOAD COOLING TIME
83
ADAPT PROG CTRL
83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD
83.02 EDIT COMMAND
83.03 EDIT BLOCK
83.04 TIMELEVEL SEL
83.05 PASSCODE
84
ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
84.01 STATUS
84.02 FAULTED PAR
84.05 BLOCK1
84.06 INPUT1
84.07 INPUT2
84.08 INPUT3
84.09 OUTPUT
84.79
85
85.01
85.02
85.03
85.04
85.05
85.06
85.07
85.08
85.09
85.10
85.11
85.12
85.13
85.14
85.15
90
90.01
90.02
90.03
90.04
90.05
92
92.01
92.02
92.03
92.04
OUTPUT
USER CONSTANTS
CONSTANT1
CONSTANT2
CONSTANT3
CONSTANT4
CONSTANT5
CONSTANT6
CONSTANT7
CONSTANT8
CONSTANT9
CONSTANT10
STRING1
STRING2
STRING3
STRING4
STRING5
D SET REC ADDR
AUX DS REF3
AUX DS REF4
AUX DS REF5
MAIN DS SOURCE
AUX DS SOURCE
D SET TR ADDR
MAIN DS STATUS WORD
MAIN DS ACT1
MAIN DS ACT2
AUX DS ACT3
FACTORY
500
500
500
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
800
0.0
0
HAND/AUTO
500
500
500
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
800
0.0
0
PID-CTRL
500
500
500
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
800
0.0
0
T-CTRL
500
500
500
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
800
0.0
0
SEQ CTRL
500
500
500
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
800
0.0
0
PB W
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
EDIT
NO
0
100ms
0
EDIT
NO
0
100ms
0
EDIT
NO
0
100ms
0
EDIT
NO
0
100ms
0
EDIT
NO
0
100ms
0
1609 W
1610
1611
1612
1613
NO
0
0
0
0
NO
0
0
0
0
NO
0
0
0
0
NO
0
0
0
0
NO
0
0
0
0
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1644
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MESSAGE1
MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3
MESSAGE4
MESSAGE5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MESSAGE1
MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3
MESSAGE4
MESSAGE5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MESSAGE1
MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3
MESSAGE4
MESSAGE5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MESSAGE1
MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3
MESSAGE4
MESSAGE5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MESSAGE1
MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3
MESSAGE4
MESSAGE5
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
0
0
0
1
3
0
0
0
1
3
0
0
0
1
3
0
0
0
1
3
0
0
0
1
3
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
302
102
105
305
302
102
105
305
302
102
105
305
302
102
105
305
302
102
105
305
1771
1772
1773
1774
258
Index Name/Selection
92.05 AUX DS ACT4
92.06 AUX DS ACT5
92.07 MSW B10 PTR
92.08 MSW B13 PTR
92.09 MSW B14 PTR
95
HARDWARE SPECIF
95.01 FAN SPD CTRL MODE
95.02 FUSE SWITCH CTRL
95.03 INT CONFIG USER
95.04 EX/SIN REQUEST
95.05 ENA INC SW FREQ
95.06 LCU Q PW REF
95.07 LCU DC REF
95.08 LCU PAR1 SEL
95.09 LCU PAR2 SEL
95.10 TEMP INV AMBIENT
96
EXTERNAL AO
96.01 EXT AO1
96.02 INVERT EXT AO1
96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1
96.04 FILTER EXT AO1
96.05 SCALE EXT AO1
96.06 EXT AO2
96.07 INVERT EXT AO2
96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2
96.09 FILTER EXT AO2
96.10 SCALE EXT AO2
96.11 EXT AO1 PTR
96.12 EXT AO2 PTR
98
OPTION MODULES
98.01 ENCODER MODULE
98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK
98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1
98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2
98.05 DI/O EXT MODULE 3
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE
98.07 COMM PROFILE
98.09 DI/O EXT1 DI FUNC
98.10 DI/O EXT2 DI FUNC
98.11 DI/O EXT3 DI FUNC
98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC
98.14 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC
98.16
99
99.01
99.02
99.03
99.04
99.05
99.06
99.07
99.08
99.09
99.10
99.11
FACTORY
308
306
3.014.09
0
0
HAND/AUTO
308
306
3.014.09
0
0
PID-CTRL
308
306
3.014.09
0
0
T-CTRL
308
306
3.014.09
0
0
CONTROLLED
Inverter type dependent
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
106
106
110
110
40C
40C
SEQ CTRL
308
306
3.014.09
0
0
PB W
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
0
1
0
0
0
106
110
40C
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
0
1
0
0
0
106
110
40C
0
1
0
0
0
106
110
40C
SPEED
NO
0 mA
0.01 s
100%
CURRENT
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
SPEED
NO
0 mA
0.01 s
100%
CURRENT
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
SPEED
NO
0 mA
0.01 s
100%
CURRENT
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
SPEED
NO
0 mA
0.01 s
100%
CURRENT
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
SPEED
NO
0 mA
0.01 s
100%
CURRENT
NO
0 mA
2.00 s
100%
0
0
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
ABB DRIVES
DI7,8,9
DI10,11,12
DI11,12
NO
UNIPOLAR
AI5
UNIPOLAR
AI6
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
ABB DRIVES
DI7,8,9
DI10,11,12
DI11,12
NO
UNIPOLAR
AI5
UNIPOLAR
AI6
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
ABB DRIVES
DI7,8,9
DI10,11,12
DI11,12
NO
UNIPOLAR
AI5
UNIPOLAR
AI6
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
ABB DRIVES
DI7,8,9
DI10,11,12
DI11,12
NO
UNIPOLAR
AI5
UNIPOLAR
AI6
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
ABB DRIVES
DI7,8,9
DI10,11,12
DI11,12
NO
UNIPOLAR
AI5
UNIPOLAR
AI6
NO
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
ENGLISH
FACTORY
NO
DTC
0V
0.0 A
50.0 Hz
1 rpm
0.0 kW
ID MAGN
ENGLISH
HAND/AUTO
NO
DTC
0V
0.0 A
50.0 Hz
1 rpm
0.0 kW
ID MAGN
ENGLISH
PID-CTRL
NO
DTC
0V
0.0 A
50.0 Hz
1 rpm
0.0 kW
ID MAGN
ENGLISH
T CTRL
NO
DTC
0V
0.0 A
50.0 Hz
1 rpm
0.0 kW
ID MAGN
ENGLISH
SEQ CTRL
NO
DTC
0V
0.0 A
50.0 Hz
1 rpm
0.0 kW
ID MAGN
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
1914 W
1915 W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
259
Related
diagrams
Continued on
sheet 2
Valid when FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL or T CTRL macro is active (see parameter 99.02).
Reference control chain, sheet 1
Valid when PID CTRL macro is active (see parameter 99.02).
Reference control chain, sheet 2
Continued on
sheet 2
Continued from
sheet 1
260
261
262
Reference control chain sheet 1: PID CTRL macro (continued on the next
page )
263
264
Reference control chain sheet 2: All macros (continued on the next page )
265
266
267
OR
EXT RESET
AND
31
AUTORESET
AND
AND
AND
MAIN CW / B0 (ON/OFF)
OR
FIELDBUS CW / B0
268
269
Index
A
ABB drives communication profile 204
Absolute maximum frequency 95, 247
Absolute maximum speed 95, 247
ACCEL TIME 1 130
ACCEL/DECEL 129
Acceleration
compensation 133
motor 98
ramps 57
settings 57
speed reference ramps 46
times 20
times, setting 42
Actual signals 53, 248250
defined 95
diagnostics 44, 52, 53
display mode 29
displaying the full names 30
parameters 52, 53
PID control 69
settings 52, 53
speed controller 58
speed controller tuning 58
user-defined variables 67
Actual values 53
actual signals 52, 53
analogue outputs 50
defined 199
digital inputs 51
relay outputs 52
Adapter module, fieldbus 186
Advent controller 191192
AI<Min settings> 61
ALARM WORD 1 216
ALARM WORD 2 217
ALARM WORD 4 219
ALARM WORD 5 220
ALARM WORD 6 221
Analogue extension module 243
Analogue inputs
optional, supervising 64
Analogue outputs
diagnostics 50
optional, supervising 64
parameters 50
settings 50
APPLICATION MACRO 97, 181
Application macros 83
factory 83, 84
hand/auto 83, 86
PID control 83, 88
reference control chain diagram 262
sequential control 83, 92
torque control 83, 90
user 83, 94
Application, selection for start-up assistant 41
Automatic resets 67
Automatic start 54
AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 3 217
AUXILIARY STATUS WORD 4 218
B
Boolean values 40
C
Cable connection, monitoring 63
Clearing
fault history 30
Communication
fault protection 64
profiles 204212
using a fieldbus adapter module 187
Communication profiles 204212
ABB drives 204
generic drive 209
Constant speeds 57
Control block diagrams 259267
Control board temperature fault 66
Control panel
basic keys 35
display mode 29
downloading drive data 37
drive control 2728
overview 2526
setting the display contrast 38
upload drive data 36
Control word 197
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile 212
Critical speeds 57
D
DC
hold 55
Index
270
intermediate circuit protection 67
magnetising 55
overvoltage fault 64
undervoltage fault 65
DECEL TIME 1 130
Deceleration
compensation 133
ramps 57
settings 57
Default tasks, start-up assistant 41
Diagnostics
actual signals 44, 52, 53
analogue outputs 50
digital inputs 51
relay outputs 52
speed controller 58
supervision of user-defined variables 67
Digital inputs
diagnostics 51
optional, supervising 64
parameters 51
settings 51
Digital outputs
optional, supervising 64
Display contrast, setting 38
Displaying
actual signal full names 30
fault history 30
Drive
changing panel link ID number 39
data, downloading to the control panel 37
data, uploading to the control panel 36
IR compensation for scalar controlled 60
reference types and processing 46
start-up 15
temperature fault 65
Drive control
parameters 193195
using I/O interface 21
clearing 30
viewing and resetting 30
FAULT WORD 1 214
FAULT WORD 2 215
FAULT WORD 4 218
FAULT WORD 5 219
FAULTED INT INFO 223
Faults
communication, protection 64
DC overvoltage 64
earth, protection 63
external, settings 61
overcurrent 64
preprogrammed 64
control board temperature 66
DC undervoltage 65
drive temperature 65
Enhanced drive temperature monitoring 65
input phase loss 66
internal fault 66
overfrequency 66
short circuit 66
Features of the program 4182
Fieldbus adapter
communication parameters 187188
module 186
Fieldbus addresses 247
Fieldbus control 185224
connecting two fieldbuses to a drive 186
control word, status word 197
interface 196203
References 197
Fieldbus reference scaling
ABB drives communication profile 208
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile 212
generic drive 211
Fieldbus, equivalent, defined 95
Flux braking 55, 56
Flux optimisation 56
Index
H
Hand/auto macro 83, 86
Hexagonal motor flux 61
271
INT SC INFO 224
Integer scaling 65
Internal fault 66
K
Keys on the control panel 35
L
LIMIT WORD 1 214
LIMIT WORD INV 221
Limits, adjustable 66
Local control 44
M
Macros
factory 83, 84
hand/auto 83, 86
overview 83
PID control 83, 88
reference control chain diagram 262
sequential control 92
defined 83
torque control 83, 90
user 94
defined 83
Modbus
adapter module 186
addressing 190
link, communication parameters 189190
Motor
identification 53
phase loss 63
stall protection 63
temperature measurement using standard I/O
70, 71
temperature thermal model 62
thermal protection 62
underload protection 63
O
Operation limits 66
Overcurrent fault 64
Overfrequency fault 66
P
Panel link ID number, changing 39
Panel loss 61
Parameter lock 67
Parameter settings, bipolar input in joystick mode
245
Parameters
actual signals 52, 53
Advent controller 191192
AI<Min> 61
analogue outputs 50
automatic reset 67
communication fault protection 64
data tables 251
defined 95
digital inputs 51
drive control 193195
earth fault protection 63
external fault 61
fieldbus adapter 187188
hexagonal motor flux 61
IR compensation 60
motor phase loss 63
motor stall protection 63
motor temperature 62
motor underload protection 63
operation limits 66
optional analogue inputs and outputs 64
parameter lock 67
reference trimming 47
relay outputs 52
scalar control 60
selecting and changing values 32
speed controller tuning 58
standard modbus link 189190
start-up assistant 41
supervision 67
PB, defined 247
Performance figures
speed controller 58
torque control 58
PID control
block diagrams 68
macro 83, 88
macro, reference control diagram 262
parameters 69
settings 69
sleep function 69
Power limit 67
Power loss ride-through 54
Preprogrammed faults 64
control board temperature 66
DC undervoltage 65
drive temperature 65
Enhanced drive temperature monitoring 65
input phase loss 66
internal fault 66
overfrequency 66
short circuit 66
Program features 4182
Index
272
Programmable
analogue outputs 50
digital inputs 51
relay outputs 52
Protection functions 61
R
Ramps
acceleration 57
deceleration 57
Reference
control chain diagrams 262
handling 198
source
EXT 1 45
types and processing 46
trimming 47
Relay outputs
diagnostics 52
parameters 52
settings 52
Resets, automatic 67
Resetting
fault history 30
S
Scalar control 60
Sequential control macro 92
defined 83
Setting, acceleration times 42
Settings
acceleration 57
actual signals 52, 53
AI<Min> 61
analogue outputs 50
automatic reset 67
automatic start 54
communication fault protection 64
constant speed 57
critical speeds 57
DC hold 55
DC magnetising 55
deceleration 57
digital inputs 51
earth fault protection 63
external control 44
external fault 61
flux braking 56
flux optimisation 56
hexagonal motor flux 61
IR compensation 60
limits 66
Index
local control 44
motor phase loss 63
motor stall protection 63
motor temperature 62
motor underload protection 63
optional analogue inputs 64
optional analogue outputs 64
optional digital inputs 64
optional digital outputs 64
parameter lock 67
PID control 69
reference trimming 47
relay outputs 52
scalar control 60
speed controller 58
supervision 67
Short circuit fault 66
Sleep function 69
example 70
Speed controller tuning 58
Speed reference
acceleration/deceleration ramps 46
parameters 244
Stall protection 63
Start-up 15
automatic start 54
basic settings 1720
guided 1516
Start-up assistant
application selection 41
default tasks 41
tasks and parameters 41
Status word 197
auxiliary 213
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile 212
Supervising user-selectable variables 67
SYSTEM FAULT WORD 216
System overview 185
T
Temperature
calculation method 62
measurement using standard I/O 70, 71
Torque control
macro 83, 90
performance figures 58
Tuning the speed controller 58
U
Underload protection 63
User macros 94
defined 83
273
user-defined, supervising 67
V
Variables 67
Viewing fault history 30
Index
274
Index
3AFE64527592 REV I / EN
EFFECTIVE: 18.05.2007
ABB Oy
AC Drives
P.O. Box 184
FI-00381 HELSINKI
FINLAND
Telephone +358 10 22 211
Telefax
+358 10 22 22681
Internet
www.abb.com
ABB Inc.
Automation Technologies
Drives & Motors
16250 West Glendale Drive
New Berlin, WI 53151
USA
Telephone
262 785-3200
800-HELP-365
Fax
262 780-5135